BMW

M3 Sedan (2009) - Car BMW - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free M3 Sedan (2009) BMW in PDF.

📄 246 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - page 3
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Car
Brand BMW
Model M3 Sedan (2009)
Engine 4.0L V8 (S65B40) producing 414 hp (309 kW)
Transmission 6-speed manual or 7-speed DCT
Drivetrain Rear-wheel drive
Fuel Type Gasoline (premium unleaded recommended)
Fuel Tank Capacity 63 liters (16.6 gallons)
Dimensions (L x W x H) 185.0 in x 70.8 in x 56.9 in (4700 mm x 1798 mm x 1445 mm)
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2760 mm)
Curb Weight Approximately 3582 lbs (1625 kg)
Seating Capacity 5 passengers
Top Speed Electronically limited to 155 mph (250 km/h)
0-60 mph (0-96 km/h) Approximately 4.8 seconds (manual) / 4.6 seconds (DCT)
Safety Features Front, side, and curtain airbags; Dynamic Stability Control; traction control
Maintenance Intervals Oil change every 15,000 miles; brake fluid every 2 years; engine air filter every 30,000 miles
Tire Size Front: 245/35R19, Rear: 265/35R19
Manual Pages 246 pages
Manual Language English

Frequently Asked Questions - M3 Sedan (2009) BMW

What type of fuel does the BMW M3 Sedan (2009) require?
The BMW M3 Sedan (2009) requires premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher for optimal performance.
What is the recommended oil type and capacity for the M3?
Use BMW TwinPower Turbo Longlife-01 5W-30 fully synthetic oil. The oil capacity (including filter) is approximately 8.8 quarts (8.3 liters).
How often should I change the oil on the 2009 M3?
BMW recommends an oil change every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or once a year, whichever comes first. However, under severe driving conditions, more frequent changes may be beneficial.
What is the proper tire pressure for the BMW M3 Sedan (2009)?
Recommended tire pressure is 32 psi (220 kPa) front and 36 psi (250 kPa) rear for normal driving. Adjust according to load conditions as specified in the owner's manual.
How do I reset the service indicator on the 2009 M3?
Turn the ignition on (do not start engine), press the trip odometer reset button until the service symbol appears, then hold the button for a few seconds until 'Reset' is shown. Confirm by pressing again. Refer to the manual for detailed steps.
What is the towing capacity of the 2009 BMW M3 Sedan?
The BMW M3 Sedan is not designed for towing. BMW does not recommend towing a trailer with this vehicle.
How do I pair a Bluetooth phone with the 2009 M3?
Enable Bluetooth on your phone, then on the car's iDrive system go to Communication > Bluetooth > Pair new device. Select 'Phone' and search for devices. Enter the PIN shown on the iDrive screen into your phone to complete pairing.
What is the correct coolant type for the 2009 M3?
Use BMW coolant (ethylene glycol-based) mixed 50/50 with distilled water. Alternatively, use a phosphate-free and silicate-free coolant meeting BMW specification.
Where can I find the VIN on the 2009 M3?
The VIN is visible through the windshield on the driver's side dashboard, and also on the driver's door jamb sticker. It is also stamped on the engine block.
What is the warranty coverage for the 2009 BMW M3 Sedan?
The 2009 M3 came with a 4-year/50,000-mile (80,000 km) new vehicle warranty, 12-year/unlimited mileage corrosion warranty, and 4-year/unlimited mileage roadside assistance.

User questions about M3 Sedan (2009) BMW

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Car in PDF format for free! Find your manual M3 Sedan (2009) - BMW and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. M3 Sedan (2009) by BMW.

USER MANUAL M3 Sedan (2009) BMW

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 1

The Ultimate Driving Machine

Contents

A-Z

M KN 4524 Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 934 - © 08/08 BMW AG

M3 Owner's Manual for Vehicle

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW M3.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW M3's unique range of technical features. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW M3 throughout an extended service life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the

written consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English VIII/08, 08 09 500

Printed on environmentally friendly paper,

bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 228.

Using this Owner's Manual

4 Notes

6 Reporting safety defects

At a glance

10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
21 Letters and numbers
22 Voice activation system

Controls

26 Opening and closing
37 Adjustments
46 Transporting children safely
49 Driving
62 Everything under control
75 Technology for driving comfort and safety
85 Lamps
89 Climate
94 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips

106 Things to remember when driving
111 BMW M3 engineering

116 Navigation system
117 Destination entry
127 Destination guidance
133 What to do if ...

Entertainment

136 On/off and tone
139 Radio
142 Satellite radio
144 CD player and CD changer
151 Music collection
155 AUX-IN port
156 USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio interface

Communications

162 Telephone
173 Contacts
175 BMW Assist

Mobility

184 Refueling
186 Wheels and tires
192 Under the hood
197 Maintenance
199 Care
203 Replacing components
210 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference

218 Technical data
221 Short commands for the voice activation system
228 Everything from A-Z

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual

We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehicle.

Additional sources of information

Should you have any other questions, your BMW center will be glad to advise you at any time.

Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used

Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Marks the end of a specific item of information.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional accessories, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.
〉...〈 Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.
»...« Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components

Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for information on a particular part or assembly.

The individual vehicle

When you ordered your BMW, you chose various items of equipment. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equipment available with a specific BMW model.

Please bear in mind that the manual may contain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equipment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.

If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accompanying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Editorial notice

BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.

For your own safety

Maintenance and repair

Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and powerful electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. You should therefore have the corresponding work on your vehicle performed only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and accessories

For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.

BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.

BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW.

BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.

Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers.

Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage

to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Parts and accessories - 1

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.

California Proposition 65 warning

California law requires us to issue the following warning:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - California Proposition 65 warning - 1

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
▶ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
▶ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - For Canadian customers - 1

natural_image Interior view of a modern car exhibition hall with curved architecture and parked cars (no visible text or signage)

At a glance This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the control concepts and options available for operating the various systems. Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 934 - © 08/08 BMW AG

At a glance

This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.

Cockpit

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
Diagram of a BMW car interior with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference.

1

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cockpit - 2

Safety switch for electric rear windows 35

2

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cockpit - 3

Opening and closing windows 34

3 Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 42

4 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb monitor* 42

5

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cockpit - 4

Parking lamps/low beams 85

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cockpit - 5

Low beams 85

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cockpit - 6

Automatic headlamp control* 85 Adaptive Head Light* 86

6

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 6 - 1

Turn signals 58

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 6 - 2

High beams, headlamp flasher 87

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 6 - 3

Roadside parking lamps* 87

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 6 - 4

Computer 63

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 6 - 5

Settings and information about the vehicle 65

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 6 - 6

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 6 - 7

Instrument lighting 87

7 Instrument cluster 12

8

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 8 - 1

Windshield wipers 59

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 8 - 2

Rain sensor* 59

9

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 9 - 1

Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 49

10 Ignition lock 49

11 Buttons on the steering wheel

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Buttons on the steering wheel - 1

Telephone*:

Press: accepting and ending a call, starting dialing* selected phone numbers. Redialing if no phone number is selected

Press longer: redialing

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Buttons on the steering wheel - 2

Volume

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Buttons on the steering wheel - 3

Activating/deactivating voice activation system* 22

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Buttons on the steering wheel - 4

Changing radio station

Selecting music track

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Buttons on the steering wheel - 5

Scrolling through phone book and lists with stored phone numbers

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Buttons on the steering wheel - 6

MDrive*, calling up individual settings 44

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Buttons on the steering wheel - 7

Recirculated-air mode 91

12 Horn: the entire surface

13 Adjusting the steering wheel 43

14

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 14 - 1

Cruise control 60

15 Releasing the hood 192

16 Opening the luggage compartment lid 30

Instrument cluster

1 2 3 2 4 5 BRAKE BRUCE ENGINE SIZON M ABS MDM 1/min x 1000 +74 °F 11:15 am 2 D 000016 001.5 1/2 10 9 8 7 6 210 210 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 100 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 J mph

1 Speedometer
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 62
5 Shift Lights * 56
6 Engine oil temperature 63
7 Display for

Clock 62
Outside temperature 62
▷ Indicator and warning lamps 70
With dual clutch transmission: Computer 63

8 Display for

Gear display M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic* 52
With manual transmission: Computer 63
Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 66
▶ Odometer and trip odometer 62
▶ Checking oil level 193
▶ Settings and information 65
There is a Check Control message 70

9 Fuel gauge 63

10 Resetting the trip odometer 62

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator and warning lamps - 1

natural_image Front view of a car dashboard with dual gauges and a digital display (no visible text or symbols)

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Some lamps are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages
Washer fluid level level CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

Text messages at the top edge of the Control Display describe the meanings of the indicator and warning lamps.

Details Washer fluid Insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir. Refill as soon as possible, refer to Owner's Manual.

You can call up more information, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 70.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages

The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamps without text messages - 1

Parking lamps/low beams 85

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamps without text messages - 2

High beams/headlamp flasher 87

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamps without text messages - 3

Parking brake applied 51

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamps without text messages - 4

MDrive* 44

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamps without text messages - 5

M Dynamic Mode* 76

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamps without text messages - 6

Lamp flashes: DSC is regulating the drive forces in order to maintain driving stability 76

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamps without text messages - 7

Engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emissions 198 Canada: engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emissions 198

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamps without text messages - 8

Around the center console: controls and displays

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification and assembly reference.

1 Microphone for voice activation system* and for telephone in hands-free mode*

2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request call* 210

3 Reading lamps 88

4 Glass roof, electric * 35

5 Interior lamps 87

6 Passenger airbag status lamp * 83

7 Control Display 16

8 Hazard warning flashers

9 Flat Tire Monitor FTM * 78 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM* 79

10 Central locking system 29

11 Automatic climate control

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 2

Air distribution to the windshield 90

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 3

Air distribution to the upper body area 90

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 4

Air distribution to the footwell 90

AUTO

Automatic air distribution and flow rate 90

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 5

Cooling function 91

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 6

Automatic recirculated-air control AUC 91

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 7

Recirculated-air mode 91

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 8

Maximum cooling 90

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 9

Residual heat mode 91

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 10

Air flow rate 91

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 11

Defrosting windows 91

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 12

Rear window defroster 92

12 CD/DVD drive 136

13 Changing the audio and entertainment sources

14 Selecting AM or FM waveband

15 Changing

Radio station 139

Track 144

16

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 13

Heated seats* 40

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Around the center console: controls and displays - 14

Roller sun blind* 97

17 Controller 16

Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four directions

18 Opening start menu on Control Display 17

19 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

20 Electronic Damper Control EDC * 77

21 M Engine Dynamics Control POWER 58

22 Programmable memory keys 20

23 Switching audio sources on/off and adjusting volume 136

24 Ejecting CD/DVD 136

iDrive

iDrive integrates the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position. The following section provides an introduction to

basic menu navigation. The control of the individual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.

Controls

Diagram showing car interior control panel with numbered instructions for rotary dial and scroll controls

1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons

You can use the buttons to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select the menu items and create settings.

Move in four directions, arrow 3
Turn, arrow 4
▶ Push, arrow 5

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Controls - 2

Operate the controller only when traffic and road conditions allow this, to avoid endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.

Buttons on the controller

Button Function
MENU Open the main menu
RADIO Open the Radio menu
CD Open the CD/Entertainment menu
NAV Open the Navigation menu
TEL Open the Telephone menu
BACK Display the previous menu
OPTIONOpen the Options menu

Operating principle

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, refer to page 49, the following message is displayed on the Control Display:

Attention! Use this system only when traffic conditions permit. Do not rely solely on Driver Assistance systems. Safe vehicle operation is the driver's responsibility. For further info see Owner's Manual. Accept

To hide the message:

Press the controller.

The main menu is displayed.

The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.

Opening the main menu

Press the MENU button.

The main menu is displayed.

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting a menu item

The menu items shown in white can be selected.

  1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

  1. Press the controller.

A new menu is displayed or the function is executed.

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g. "Settings"

Changing between panels

After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can overlap.

Move the controller to the left or right to change between the panels.

FM Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96.3 KLASSIK 100.0 MHz 101.3 MHz

White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.

Open the Options menu

Press the OPTION button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Options Split screen Switch off display Bayern 1 Store station

Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu appears.

The "Options" menu contains the following:

Screen settings, refer to page 19.

▶ Control options for the selected menu.

Adjusting settings

  1. Select a field.
  2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

Volume settings Speed volume Volume setting: PDC Gong

  1. Press the controller to confirm the setting.

The scroll bar on the right side indicates whether additional menu items or settings can be selected that are currently not visible.

Example: setting the clock

  1. Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed.
  2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

  1. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Settings ✓ Time/Date Language/Units Tone Limit Climate Lighting Door locks

  1. Turn the controller until "Time:" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Time/Date Time: 09:30 Format: 24 h Date: 27.05.2012 Format: tt.mm.jjjj

  1. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

  2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information

1 2 3 4 1:30 pm all 12 Ti Santana Supernatural 00:08 12/99

1 Time

2 Display for:

▶ Reception strength of the wireless network, depends on the mobile phone
▶ Incoming, outgoing or missed call
▶ SMS* received

3 Display for:

Entertainment: Radio, CD/DVD, external devices, TV*
Telephone*: Name of the mobile phone paired with the vehicle

4 Sound output is switched off or display for traffic bulletins*:

"TI": Traffic bulletins are switched on.
No display: Traffic bulletins are switched off.

Other displays:

Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or entries via the voice activation system*.

Switching the Control Display off/on

  1. Press the OPTION button.
  2. "Switch off display"

Options Split screen Switch off display

Press the controller to switch on.

Split screen

Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g. information from the computer.

In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

  1. Press the OPTION button.
  2. "Split screen"

The split screen is activated.

Selecting the display for the split screen content

When the split screen is switched on, you can select the content displayed on the screen.

  1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen content is selected.
  2. Select the display.

Split screen content ✓ Split screen Map facing north Map direction of travel Map view with perspective Position ✓ Onboard info Trip computer

Programmable memory keys

Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the programmable memory keys and called up directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and entry points into the menu.

Storing functions

  1. Select the function via iDrive.
  2. ... Press the desired key for longer than two seconds.

Example for programmable memory keys

Switch the voice instructions for the navigation on/off.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"
  3. Select the symbol using the controller.
  4. ... Press the desired key for longer than two seconds.

Executing a function

... Press the button.

The function is executed immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying memory key assignments

Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

Displaying brief information

1 ... Touch the button.

The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

Displaying detailed information

1 ... Press the button for an extended period.

Letters and numbers

Entering letters and numbers

  1. Turn the controller: select the letters or numbers.
  2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed.
  3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete one letter or number
Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers
Enter a blank space

Switching between letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering letters and numbers:

Symbol Function

A^BC Entering letters
1^2_3 Entering numbers

Wordmatch concept during navigation

Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically.

Destination search: the entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle.

The only letters offered for entering addresses are those for which data are available.

Town/city names can be entered with the spelling used in any of the languages available on the Control Display.

Voice activation system

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Voice activation system - 1

The concept

The voice activation system allows you to control operation of various vehicle systems without removing your hands from the steering wheel.

Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. It is not necessary to use the controller.

The voice activation system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.

The voice activation system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 14.

Precondition

Via iDrive, select the language in which the voice activation system is operating, so that the spoken commands can be identified. Selecting the language for iDrive, refer to page 73.

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

{...} Say the specified commands word for word.

{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice activation system.

Saying commands

Activating voice activation system

  1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal indicate that the voice activation system is ready to receive spoken commands.

2. Say the command.

The command appears on the Control Display.

This symbol appears on the Control Display when you can enter additional commands.

If no further commands are possible, continue by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.

Terminating or canceling voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or

{Cancel}

In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the procedure can only be canceled using the button on the steering wheel.

Possible commands

The commands available in each case depend on the menu item selected on the Control Display.

To have the available commands read aloud:

{Voice commands}

For example, if "CD/DVD" is selected, the commands for operating CD/Multimedia are read aloud.

Using alternative commands

There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Using alternative commands - 1

Radio on( or >Radio<

Calling up functions immediately via short commands

Short commands enable you to perform certain functions immediately, irrespective of which menu item is selected, refer to page 221.

Example: selecting the track of a CD

  1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio output.

  2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Example: selecting the track of a CD - 1

  1. Select the music track, e.g.:

CD track 4

System says:

Track 4<<

Setting the voice dialog

You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts and responses from the system are abbreviated.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Language/Units"
  3. "Speech mode:"

Speech mode ✓ Default Short

  1. To select the setting:

"Default"
▶ "Short"

Notes

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Notes - 1

For information on voice control of the telephone, refer also to the separate

Owner's Manual.

For voice commands, bear in mind the following:

Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.
▶ Pronounce the commands and digits smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses. This also applies when spelling out and saying a full word during destination entry.
When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name.
For entries in the voice-activated phone book, only use names in the language of the voice activation system and no abbreviations.
Keep the doors, windows and glass roof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.
Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

START STOP ENGINE Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 934 - © 08/08 BMW AG

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Notes - 3

natural_image Gradient background with no visible text, symbols, or identifiable objects

Controls

This chapter is intended to provide you with information for complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 934 - © 08/08 BMW AG

Opening and closing

Remote control

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Remote control - 1

natural_image Black and white photo of a BMW car key with a circular emblem on the side (no visible text or symbols)

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Remote control - 2

natural_image Close-up of a black car key with a blue circular logo and white buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In cars with convenient access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 34.

The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car, refer to Personal Profile below.

In addition, information about service requirements is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 197.

Integrated key

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Integrated key - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car plug with labeled component 1, showing internal structure and directional arrow (no text or symbols beyond labels)

Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

Glove compartment, refer to page 97

Driver's door, refer to page 29

New remote controls

Your BMW center can supply new remote controls with integrated keys as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.

Personal Profile

The concept

You can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control used for the purpose is recognized and the settings stored for it are called up and implemented.

This means that your personal settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings. The individual settings are stored for a maximum of four remote controls. They are stored for two remote controls if convenient access* is in use.

Personal Profile settings

For more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.

Assignment of programmable memory keys, refer to page 20
Response of the central locking system when the car is unlocked, refer to page 27
▶ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 29
▶ Automatic call-up of the driver's seat position after unlocking, refer to page 40
▶ Programming buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 44
MDrive*, refer to page 44

Calling up the preferred program of the M Engine Dynamics Control POWER and Electronic Damper Control EDC* when starting the vehicle, refer to Configuring settings on page 44

Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 58

▶ Settings for the displays on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster:

12h/24h format of the clock, refer to page 69
Date format, refer to page 70
Brightness of Control Display, refer to page 73
Language on the Control Display, refer to page 73
Units of measure, refer to page 65

Show visual warning for Park Distance Control PDC*, refer to page 75

Light settings:

▶ Welcome lamps, refer to page 85
▶ Pathway lighting, refer to page 86
Daytime running lamps, refer to page 86

Automatic climate control: activating/deactivating AUTO program, cooling function and automatic recirculated-air control, setting temperature, air flow rate and distribution, refer to page 90 ff

Entertainment:

▶ Audio volume, refer to page 136
▶ Tone control, refer to page 136
▶ Speed-dependent volume control, refer to page 137

Central locking system

The concept

The central locking system functions when the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:

Doors

Luggage compartment lid
▶ Fuel filler door

Operating from outside

Via the remote control
Via the door lock*
In cars with convenient access*, via the handles on the driver's and front passenger's doors

In addition, if the remote control is used, the welcome lamps, interior lamps and the door's courtesy lamps* are switched on or off. The alarm system* is also armed or disarmed.

For further details of the alarm system, refer to page 31.

Operating from inside

By means of the button for central locking, refer to page 29.

In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: Using the remote control

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening and closing: Using the remote control - 1

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You

should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.

Unlocking

Press the button.

The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps* and the welcome lamps come on.

Setting unlocking characteristics

You can set whether only the driver's door or the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the button is pressed for the first time.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Door locks"

3. "Unlock button"

Door locks Unlock button: All doors □ Last seat position auto. □ Lock if no door is opened □ Lock after start. to drive □ Flash when lock/unlock.

4. Select a menu item:

"All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.
"Driver's door only" Pressing the button once unlocks the driver's door and fuel filler door. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.
"Comfort opening", refer to page 28

5. Press the controller.

Convenient opening

Hold the button down. The windows and the glass roof* are opened.

Locking

Press the button.

Switching on interior lamps

While the car is locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.

Unlocking the luggage compartment lid

Press the button for approx. 1 second.

The luggage compartment lid opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.

The luggage compartment lid swings backwards and up when opened. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance. To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do not place the

remote control in the cargo bay. A previously locked luggage compartment lid is locked again after closing.

Before and after each trip, check that the luggage compartment lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.

Setting confirmation signals

You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Door locks"
  3. "Flash when lock./unlock."

Door locks Unlock button: All doors □ Last seat position auto. □ Lock if no door is opened □ Lock after start. to drive □ Flash when lock/unlock.

4. Press the controller.

RV Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehicle is switched on.

Malfunctions

The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key.

In vehicles without an alarm system* or convenient access*, only the driver's door can be locked and unlocked with the integrated key via the door lock.

If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is discharged. Use the remote control on an extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to page 26. The remote control for convenient access* contains a battery that may have to be changed, refer to page 34.

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:

FCC ID:

LX8766S

LX8766E

LX8CAS

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device must not cause harmful interference, and

This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - For US owners only - 1

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.

Opening and closing: Using the door lock

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening and closing: Using the door lock - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a curved arrow pointing downward through a central point, with no text or symbols present.

You can set the way in which the car is unlocked, refer to page 27.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening and closing: Using the door lock - 2

In vehicles without an alarm system* or convenient access*, only the driver's

door can be locked via the door lock.

To lock all doors, the fuel filler door and the luggage compartment lid at once:

  1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using the button for the central locking system in the interior, refer to page 29.

  2. Unlock and open the driver's or front passenger's door, refer to page 30.

  3. Lock the vehicle.

Lock the driver's door via the door lock using the integrated key, or
push down the locking knob on the front passenger's door and close the door from the outside.

Convenient operation

if the vehicle is equipped with an alarm system* or convenience access*, you can also operate the windows and the glass roof* via the door lock.

Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Convenient operation - 1

Watch during the closing process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing

the key stops the operation.

Manual operation

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the integrated key to the corresponding limit positions in the door lock.

Opening and closing: From inside

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening and closing: From inside - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle air conditioner unit with a close-up of the front panel showing a printer and a download icon (no text or symbols on main components)

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the luggage compartment lid when the doors are closed, but does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.

Automatic locking

You can also set the situations in which the car locks:

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Door locks"
  3. Select the desired function:

"Lock if no door is opened" The central locking system locks the vehicle after a brief time if no door has been opened.
"Lock after start. to drive" The central locking system locks the vehicle when you drive away.

Door locks Unlock button: All doors Last seat position auto. Lock if no door is opened Lock after start. to drive Flash when lock/unlock.

Automatic locking is switched on and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Unlocking and opening doors

Either unlock the doors together using the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or
pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Locking

Use the central locking button to lock all of the doors simultaneously, or
press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Locking - 1

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.

Luggage compartment lid

In order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the luggage compartment lid.

Opening from inside

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening from inside - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car with a visible seatbelt and a car icon (no text or symbols)

Press the button: the luggage compartment lid opens unless it has been locked.

Opening from outside

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening from outside - 1

natural_image Rear view of a car showing the front bumper and side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button, see arrow, or the button on the remote control for a longer period. The luggage compartment lid will open slightly. It can now be swung upwards.

In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Locking or unlocking separately

Diagram showing a car door panel with labeled buttons and a zoomed-in view highlighting two key components.

The switch is located in the glove compartment.

1 Locking the luggage compartment lid
2 Unlocking the luggage compartment lid

Locking separately

Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1. The luggage compartment lid is locked and cannot be unlocked using the central locking system.

If you give the remote control without the integrated key to someone else while the glove compartment is locked, the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened. This is an advantage when valet parking, for example. Locking the glove compartment, refer to page 98.

Unlocking separately

Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.

Emergency release

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Emergency release - 1

natural_image Warning symbol with a triangle and downward arrow inside, no text or numbers present

Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage compartment lid is unlocked.

Closing

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull down.

Make sure that the closing path of the luggage compartment lid is clear, otherwise injuries may result.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Closing - 1

natural_image Top-down view of a car rear bumper with no visible text or symbols

Alarm system\*

The concept

The vehicle alarm system responds:

When a door, the hood or the luggage compartment lid is opened
To movements inside the vehicle: Interior motion sensor, refer to page 32
When the car's inclination changes, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away
When there is an interruption in the power supply from the battery

The alarm system signals unauthorized entry attempts for a short time by means of:

An acoustic alarm
▶ Switching on the hazard warning flashers
Flashing the high beams

Arming and disarming

When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

You can open the luggage compartment lid using the button of the remote control even if the alarm system is armed, refer to page 28.

The lid is locked and monitored again as soon as it is closed.

Panic mode\*

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation:

Press the button for at least three seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching off an alarm

Unlock the car with the remote control, refer to page 27.
Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

Indicator lamp displays

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamp displays - 1

natural_image Simple line drawing of a car frontview mirror (no text or symbols)

The indicator lamp under the inside rearview mirror flashes continuously: the system is armed.
The indicator lamp flashes after locking: doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to monitor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and the tilt alarm sensor are not activated.
The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away.
If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle.

Interior motion sensor

In order for the interior motion sensor to function properly, the windows and glass roof must be completely closed*.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time. This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:

In duplex garages
During transport on car-carrying trains, boats/ships or on a trailer
When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subsequently locked again.

Convenient access\*

Convenient access enables you to enter your vehicle without needing to hold the remote control in your hand. All you need to do is wear the remote control close to your body, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corresponding remote control within the immediate vicinity or in the passenger compartment.

Convenient access supports the following functions:

▶ Unlocking/locking the vehicle
Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately
Starting the engine

▷ Convenient closing

Functional requirement

The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid can only be locked when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is outside of the vehicle.
The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked again until after approx. 2 seconds.
The engine can only be started when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is inside the vehicle.

Comparison to the standard remote control

In general, there is no difference between using convenient access or pressing the buttons on the remote control to carry out the functions mentioned above. You should therefore first familiarize yourself with the instructions on opening and closing starting on page 26.

Special features regarding the use of convenient access are described below.

If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing windows or the glass roof, the system is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle. Please repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.

Unlocking
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Comparison to the standard remote control - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car door handle with two directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Grasp the handle on the driver's or front passenger's door completely, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the button.

Locking

Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the 🔒 LOCK button.

To preserve the battery, please make sure that the ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle.

Convenient closing

For convenient closing, refer to page, touch the surface continuously, arrow 2.

For convenient closing, refer to page 29, touch the surface continuously, arrow 2.

Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately

Press the button on the outside of the luggage compartment lid. This corresponds to pressing the 📁 button.

If the vehicle detects that a remote control has been accidentally left inside the locked vehicle's cargo bay after the luggage compartment lid is closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning flashers flash and an acoustic signal* sounds.

Switching on radio readiness

Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the start/stop button, refer to page 49.

Do not depress the brake or the clutch, otherwise the engine will start.

Starting the engine

You can start the engine or switch on the ignition when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition lock, refer to page 49.

Malfunction

Convenient access may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or using the integrated key. To start the engine afterward, insert the remote control into the ignition lock.

Warning lamps

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Warning lamps - 1

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot

be started. The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition lock.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Warning lamps - 2

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no

longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Warning lamps - 3

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message appears on the Control Display:

replace the battery in the remote control.

Replacing the battery

The remote control for convenient access contains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

  1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 26.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Replacing the battery - 1

natural_image 3D illustration of a car battery pack with an arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)
  1. Remove the cover.
  2. Insert the new battery with the plus side facing up.
  3. Press the cover on to close.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Replacing the battery - 2

Take the old battery to a battery collection point or to your BMW center.

Windows

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Windows - 1

To prevent injuries, watch the windows while closing them.

Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the electric windows and possibly injure themselves.

Opening, closing

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening, closing - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with air filters and a control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.
Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

There are separate switches in the rear seat armrests.

After switching off the ignition

When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no door is opened.

Convenient operation

For information on convenient operation via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 27 or 29. For information on closing with convenient access, refer to Locking on page 28.

Pinch protection system

If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Pinch protection system - 1

Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the window's travel path prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing.

Do not install any accessories that might interfere with window movement. Otherwise the pinch protection system could be impaired.

Closing without pinch protection

If there is an external danger, or if ice on the windows, etc., prevents you from closing the windows normally, proceed as follows:

  1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.
  2. Pull the switch again past the resistance point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protection.

Safety switch
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Closing without pinch protection - 1

natural_image Interior view of a washing machine with a hand tool and a control panel (no visible text or symbols)

With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear windows from being opened or closed via the switches in the rear passenger area, by children, for example. When the safety function is switched on, the LED comes on.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Closing without pinch protection - 2

Always press the safety switch when children ride in the rear, otherwise unchecked closing of the windows could lead to injuries.

Glass roof\*, electric

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Glass roof\*, electric - 1

To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof while closing it.

Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Glass roof\*, electric - 2

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with a control panel and a close-up of the left side (no text or symbols visible)

Raising

Press the switch.

The closed glass roof is raised and the sliding visor opens slightly.
The open glass roof automatically travels into the raised position. The sliding visor remains open.

Opening, closing

Press the switch backwards to the resistance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open together as long as you hold the switch in this position.
Press the switch backwards past the resistance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open automatically. Briefly press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

You can close the glass roof in a similar manner by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand.

For information on convenient operation via the remote control or door lock, refer to page 27 or 29.

After switching off the ignition

When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the roof

for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system

If the glass roof encounters an obstruction during closing from approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or during closing from the raised position, the closing movement is interrupted and the glass roof is opened again slightly.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Pinch protection system - 1

Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the roof's travel path prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the roof would continue closing.

Closing without pinch protection

If there is an external danger, press the switch forward past the resistance point. The roof closes without pinch protection.

Following interruptions in electrical power supply

After a power failure, there is a possibility that the glass roof can only be raised. The system must be initialized. BMW recommends having this work done by your BMW center.

Closing manually\*

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the glass roof manually:

  1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior lamps using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 203.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Closing manually\* - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car seatbelt with two white arrows pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols visible)
  1. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on each side to press the clips.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Closing manually\* - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car air vent with a screwdriver inserted, showing internal components and a close-up of the tool (no text or symbols visible)
  1. Remove the control unit.
  2. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort will be required for manual operation.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Closing manually\* - 3

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with an inset showing a close-up of a connector detail (no visible text or symbols)
  1. Insert the Allen wrench * supplied with the onboard tool kit, refer to page 203, into the opening provided. Move the glass roof in the desired direction.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Closing manually\* - 4

natural_image Close-up of a black mechanical component with a curved metal rod inserted, mounted on a white surface (no text or symbols visible)
  1. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the lamp cover.

Adjustments

Sitting safely

The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In conjunction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section.

For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 46.

Airbags

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Airbags - 1

Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off.

No one and nothing is to come between the airbags and the seat occupant.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.

Make sure that passengers do not lean their heads against the side or head airbags, otherwise serious injuries could result if the airbags suddenly deployed.

Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 82.

Head restraint

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Head restraint - 1

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Head restraints, refer to page 39.

Safety belt

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Your vehicle has five seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Safety belt - 1

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen.

The safety belt must not rest against the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt so that it sits as snugly as possible against the lap and shoulder without being twisted. Otherwise the belt could slide over your hips and injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal collision.

Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise its restraining effect could be impaired.

Safety belts, refer to page 41.

Seats

Note before adjusting

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Note before adjusting - 1

Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

On the front passenger seat as well, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally provided by the belt.

Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 39, and on damaged safety belts on page 42.

Manual adjustment

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Manual adjustment - 1

Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible per-protection.

Thigh support

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Thigh support - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever and move the thigh support forward or back.

Electrical adjustment

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Electrical adjustment - 1

Observe the adjustment instructions on page 37 to ensure the best possible per-protection.

Diagram showing a car interior with numbered directional arrows and labeled parts, likely indicating movement or positioning.

1 Longitudinal direction

2 Height

3 Angle

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Electrical adjustment - 3

natural_image Close-up of a car's front panel with a black plug and warning symbol (no readable text or numbers)

4 Backrest

The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer to Head restraints below.

Lumbar support\*

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Lumbar support\* - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car interior with a highlighted switch and control panel (no text or symbols visible)

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

Increase or decrease curvature: press the switch at the front or rear, respectively.
Shift curvature up or down: press the switch at the top or bottom, respectively.

Backrest width\*

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Backrest width\* - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with a finger pointing to the left side of the button (no text or symbols visible)

You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lateral-support pads.

Press the front or rear end of the switch. Backrest width decreases or increases accordingly.

Head restraints

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. Reinstall the head restraint before transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise, the passenger will be without protection from the head restraint.

Front active head restraints

In a rear collision of a sufficient strength, the active head restraint reduces the distance to the head.

Do not use seat or head restraint covers that could impair the function of the active head restraint. Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will not be ensured and its full potential in reducing the risk of injury in the event of a rear collision may not be realized.

In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or triggering of the active head restraints, have the testing, repair and removal executed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to repair procedures of BMW with correspondingly trained personnel and that has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to work on the system could lead to failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Front active head restraints - 1

For technical reasons, the head restraint cannot be removed.

Front seats

Height adjustment

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Height adjustment - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

To raise: pull up.

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Rear seats

Height adjustment

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Height adjustment - 1

natural_image Mechanical component diagram showing a piston-like head with directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

To raise: pull up.

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

The center head restraint is not height-adjustable.

Removing

Only with through-loading system*:

  1. Pull up as far as it will go.
  2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat backrest slightly forward and pull the head restraint all the way out.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Removing - 1

Only remove the head restraints if no passengers will be sitting in the rear. Reinstall head restraints before transporting passengers in the rear.

Folding head restraints down and back up

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Folding head restraints down and back up - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car showing a cylindrical component with a circular arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Folding down:

Press the button, arrow 1.

Folding up:

Pull the head restraint.

Depending on the equipment version, it may be possible to fold down the outer rear head restraints as well.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Folding head restraints down and back up - 2

Only fold the head restraints down if no passengers will be sitting in the rear. Fold up the head restraints before transporting passengers in the rear.

Heated seats\*

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Heated seats\* - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car air conditioner unit with control panel and drive slots (no visible text or symbols)

Press once for each temperature level.

Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.

To switch off:

Press button longer.

If you continue driving within approx.

15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature.

The temperature is lowered or the heating is switched off entirely to save on battery power.

The LEDs stay lit.

Seat and mirror memory

You can store and call up two different combinations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror positions.

Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.

Storing

MEMORY 1 2

  1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, refer to page 49.

  2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions.

  3. Press the button.

The LED in the button lights up.

  1. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the LED goes out.

The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Call-up

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Call-up - 1

Do not call up memory while you are driving, otherwise unexpected seat move-could result in an accident.

Convenience mode

  1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch on radio readiness, refer to page 49.
  2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.

The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Safety feature

  1. Close the driver's door and switch the ignition on or off, refer to page 49.
  2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and keep it pressed until the adjustment process has been completed.

If the button was pressed accidentally: Press the button again; the LED goes out.

Call-up with the remote control

The driver's seat position last stored is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can select the occasion on which the seat is reset to that position.

▶ Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.
▶ Call-up when the driver's door is opened.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Call-up with the remote control - 1

When this Personal Profile function is used, first make sure that the footwell behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.

The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Selecting automatic call-up

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Door locks"

  3. "Last seat position auto."

Door locks Unlock button: All doors □ Last seat position auto. □ Lock if no door is opened □ Lock after start. to drive □ Flash when lock/unlock.

The function for automatically calling up the last seat position is switched on and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Switching off automatic call-up

Deactivate "Last seat position automatic"

Safety belts

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Safety belts - 1

Observe the adjustment instructions on page 37 to ensure the best possible per-protection.

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

On the rear seats, the center belt buckle marked with the letters CENTER is solely intended for the center passenger.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Safety belts - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car seatbelt with an inset showing the seatbelt attachment detail (no text or symbols visible)

Closing

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted properly, refer to page 37.

Opening

  1. Grasp the belt firmly.
  2. Press the red button in the buckle.
  3. Guide the belt into its reel.

'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front seats

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - 'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front seats - 1

The indicator lamps light up and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt has been fastened correctly.

The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as long as the driver's safety belt has not been fastened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also activated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt is not fastened, if objects are placed on the front passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts.

Damage to safety belts

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Damage to safety belts - 1

If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the belt system, including any belt tensioners or child-restraint systems, replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work done only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is not guaranteed that the safety devices will function properly.

Rear center safety belt

With through-loading system*:

Before using the center rear seat, release the latch plate from the fixture on the rear window shelf and insert it into the belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Rear center safety belt - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a car seatbelt buckle assembly with an inset close-up of the component (no text or symbols present)

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Exterior mirrors - 1

The front passenger's mirror is more convex than the driver's mirror. The objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.

Technical diagram showing a device with labeled parts and an inset view of a component with numbered annotations.

1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic curb monitor*
3 Folding mirrors in and out*

The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for the remote control currently in use. The stored position is called up automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.

Manual adjustment

The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press the edge of the glass.

Folding mirrors in and out\*

At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by

pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for example, or for moving mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into their correct positions. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Folding mirrors in and out\* - 1

Before entering an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors manually or

with button 3 to prevent them from being damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

Automatic heating\*

Depending on the outside temperature, both exterior mirrors are heated automatically when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Passenger-side mirror tilt function – automatic curb monitor\*

Activating

  1. Push the switch to the position for the driver's-side mirror, arrow 1.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Activating - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car air conditioner unit showing fan, vent, and control panel (no text or symbols visible)
  1. Engage reverse gear or transmission position R.

The glass of the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into a parking space.

Deactivating

Push the switch to the position for the passenger-side mirror, arrow 2.

Interior and exterior mirrors\*, automatic dimming feature

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Interior and exterior mirrors\*, automatic dimming feature - 1

natural_image Simple line drawing of a car interior panel with a downward arrow pointing to the bottom panel (no text or symbols)

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Interior and exterior mirrors\*, automatic dimming feature - 2

The automatic dimming feature of the interior and exterior mirrors* is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back of the mirror.

In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror.

Steering wheel

Adjustments

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Adjustments - 1

Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion, otherwise there

is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Adjustments - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Adjustments - 3

  1. Fold the lever down.
  2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated position.
  3. Swing the lever back up.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Adjustments - 4

Do not use force to swing the lever back up, otherwise the mechanism

will be damaged.

MDrive\*

With MDrive you can configure several individual settings for your vehicle on the Control Display and activate them using the button on the steering wheel.

Configuring settings

You can set MDrive on the Control Display when the ignition is switched on.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

  1. "MDrive"

Settings MDrive Central display Time/Date Language/Units Tone Limit ✓ Climate

The functions contained in MDrive are displayed:

"Drivelogic:"

M dual clutch transmission with Drivel-

ogic: shift modes and Drivelogic drive programs, refer to page 55

"EDC:" Electronic Damper Control EDC* pro- grams, refer to page 77
"DSC:" Dynamic Stability Control and M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 76
"POWER:" M Engine Dynamics Control programs, refer to page 58
"Servotronic:" Servotronic programs, refer to page 81
"Shift lights:" Shift Lights, refer to page 56

  1. Select the desired function.

MDrive Drivelogic: D 5 EDC: Normal DSC: MDM POWER: Sport Plus Servotronic: Sport Shift lights: ON

  1. Select the desired setting.

DSC Off ON ✓ M Dynamic Mode Unchanged

"Unchanged" retains the current setting made outside of MDrive.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Activating the settings

Press the button on the steering wheel.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Activating the settings - 1

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. The settings made on the Control Display for the functions we are active.

Pressing the button again deactivates MDrive.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Activating the settings - 2

If the indicator lamp flashes after the button was pressed, MDrive was unable to respond because the Antilock Brake System ABS or Dynamic Stability Control DSC are currently regulating driving stability. Press the

button again when the indicator lamp is no longer flashing.

You can change individual settings outside of MDrive even when MDrive is activated, e.g. using the buttons on the center console. To reactivate all settings made on the Control Display for MDrive: press the button twice.

Resetting the settings

You can reset all MDrive settings to their default values:

  1. "Settings"
  2. "MDrive"
  3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is selected.
  4. "Reset"

Options Switch off display M Key settings POWER Sport Plus EDC Normal Shift lights ON MDrive Reset

  1. "Yes"

M Key settings

For the remote control currently in use, you can set your preferred program for the M Engine Dynamics Control, the Electronic Damper Control EDC and the Shift Lights. These preset- tings are called up when the engine is started.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "MDrive"

MDrive Drivelogic: D 5 EDC: Normal DSC: MDM POWER: Sport Plus Servotronic: Sport Shift lights: ON

  1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is selected.

The available functions are displayed:

"POWER:" M Engine Dynamics Control programs, refer to page 58
"EDC:" Electronic Damper Control* programs, refer to page 77
"Shift lights:" Shift Lights, refer to page 56

  1. Select the desired function.

Options Switch off display M Key settings POWER Sport Plus EDC Normal Shift lights ON MDrive Reset

  1. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Transporting children safely

The right place for children

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - The right place for children - 1

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, otherwise they could endanger themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.

The rear center seat is not suitable for installing child-restraint systems for all age groups, approved for the age group in question.

Children always in the rear

Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Children always in the rear - 1

Children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only in the rear in suitable child-restraint systems appropriate for their age, weight and size. Otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Children 13 years of age or older must be buckled in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child-restraint system that is appropriate for their age, size and weight.

Exception for front passenger seat

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Exception for front passenger seat - 1

Should it be necessary to use a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front and side airbags for the front passenger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child traveling on that seat will face a significant risk of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even with a child-restraint system.

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 83.

Installing child-restraint systems

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Installing child-restraint systems - 1

Observe the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when selecting, installing and using child-restraint systems.

Otherwise the protective effect may be diminished.

Standard child-restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly or improperly installed child-restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to children. Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care.

On the front passenger seat

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - On the front passenger seat - 1

After installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that the front and side airbags for the front passenger are deactivated, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.

Backrest width\*

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Backrest width\* - 1

The backrest width of the front passenger's seat must be at its widest possible setting. Do not change the setting after installing the child seat. Otherwise the child seat's stability on the front passenger's seat is limited.

  1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest setting, refer to page 39.

  2. Install the child seat.

Child seat security
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Backrest width\* - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car showing passenger seat, rear seats, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

The rear safety belts and the front passenger's safety belt can be prevented from being pulled out in order to fasten child-restraint systems.

To lock the safety belt

  1. Secure the child-restraint system with the belt.
  2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
  3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child-restraint system.
    The safety belt is locked.

To unlock the safety belt

  1. Open the belt buckle.
  2. Remove the child-restraint system.
  3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way.

LATCH child-restraint fixing system

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - LATCH child-restraint fixing system - 1

To install and use the LATCH child restraint system, follow the operating and safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system, otherwise the protective function of the seat may be compromised.

Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - LATCH child-restraint fixing system - 2

Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors are correctly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting firmly against the backrest, otherwise the protective function of the seat may be compromised.

Rear seats with through-loading system\*

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Rear seats with through-loading system\* - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle with a medical device icon and a close-up of a fetus inside (no text or symbols)

The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the labeled protective caps.

Rear seats without through-loading system\*

Medical or healthcare image showing a person in a wheelchair with directional arrows and a circular icon containing a figure symbol.

The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located at the positions indicated by arrows, in the gap between the seat and the backrest.

Child-restraint system with tether strap

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Child-restraint system with tether strap - 1

Use the top tether anchors to secure child-restraint systems only, otherwise

the anchors could be damaged.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Child-restraint system with tether strap - 2

natural_image Top-down view of a vehicle rearview with three white boxes and three upward-pointing arrows indicating directions (no text or symbols)

There are three additional anchors for child-restraint systems with tether straps, see arrows.

Placement of the tether strap

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Placement of the tether strap - 1

Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise the strap will not properly secure the child-restraint system in the event of an accident.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child-restraint system

If necessary, fold the head restraints* upward before use.

  1. Push the head restraint upward.
  2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint holders.
  3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to the anchor.

  4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.

  5. Pull the retaining strap taut.

On journeys

Child-safety locks for rear doors

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Child-safety locks for rear doors - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car showing the side panel and side door, with an inset close-up of a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

Slide down the safety lever on the rear door:

The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for power windows

Press the safety switch for the power windows, refer to page 35, if children are traveling on the rear seat.

Driving

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Ignition lock - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car dashboard with a black connector and a white arrow pointing to the button (no visible text or symbols)

Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

Radio readiness is switched on. Individual electrical consumers can operate.

Convenient access\*

If the car is equipped with convenient access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock under special circumstances, refer to page 32.

Removing the remote control from the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause damage.

Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism.

The ignition is switched off if it was on.

Start/stop button

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Start/stop button - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and infotainment (no visible text or symbols)

Pressing the start/stop button switches radio readiness or the ignition on or off.

Manual transmission: when you press the start/stop button while the clutch is depressed, the engine starts.

M dual clutch transmission: when you press the start/stop button while the brake is depressed, the engine starts.

Radio readiness

Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the outside temperature are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is switched off automatically:

When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock
In cars with convenient access*, by touching the surface above the door lock, refer to Locking on page 33

Ignition on

All electrical consumers can operate. The odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.

When the engine is off, please switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical consumers in order to preserve the battery.

Radio readiness and ignition off

All indicator and warning lamps as well as displays in the instrument cluster go out.

Starting the engine

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Starting the engine - 1

Do not run the engine in closed rooms, otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust gases can cause unconsciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running, otherwise such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard.

Before leaving the car with the engine running, place the transmission in neutral and forcefully apply the parking brake to prevent the car from moving.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Starting the engine - 2

Avoid frequent starting in quick succession as well as repeated start attempts in which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.

Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Starting the engine - 3

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard controls (no visible text or symbols)

Manual transmission

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with convenient access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 32.

  1. Depress the brake.
  2. Depress the clutch and shift to neutral.
  3. Press the start/stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

To stop the starting procedure: press the start/stop button again.

M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with convenient access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 32.

  1. Depress the brake.
  2. Press the start/stop button.

The engine starts with the selector level in any position. Driving off: with the engine running, move the selector level from the middle position

- in the desired direction.

Every time you start the engine, sequential mode is activated in program S3 if you lightly press the selector lever to the right to position D/S with the brake pedal depressed.

Switching off the engine

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Switching off the engine - 1

Always take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle.

When parking, forcefully apply the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Manual transmission

  1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/stop button.
  2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
  3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
  4. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 49.

M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic

  1. Press the start/stop button. If N is engaged when you switch off the engine, you are notified visually and acoustically.
  2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

  3. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 49. This automatically engages transmission position P.

Before driving into a car wash

The vehicle is able to roll when you perform the following steps:

  1. Insert the remote control, even with convenient access, into the ignition lock.
  2. Depress the brake.
  3. Engage transmission position N.
  4. Switch off the engine.

Transmission position P is engaged:

▶ Automatically after approx. 30 minutes
When you remove the remote control from the ignition lock

Parking brake

The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Indicator lamp

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamp - 1

The indicator lamp is lit, and when you drive off an acoustic signal sounds in addition. The parking brake is still

applied.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator lamp - 2

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

Applying

The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Releasing - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with a hand tool inserted, showing no visible text or symbols

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.

In exceptional cases, if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car, do not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, continuously press the button of the parking brake lever.

Otherwise, excessive force on the parking brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to swerve.

To prevent corrosion and one-sided braking action, occasionally apply the parking brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.

The brake lamps do not light up when the parking brake is applied.

Manual transmission

R 1 3 5 2 4 6

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise the engine could be damaged if you inadvertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.

Reverse gear

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic\*

The concept

The M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic is an automated manual transmission with two clutches and a partial transmission in which an electro-hydraulic system takes over clutch action and shifting.

With the M dual clutch transmission, gears are changed without interruption of the traction force.

The M dual clutch transmission is operated using the selector lever and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.

The transmission offers you the following functions:

Selection between manual or automatic operation, sequential mode or drive mode
Selection between different drive programs, Drivelogic, refer to page 55
Shift Lights, refer to page 56
▶ Automatic downshifting and protection against selecting the wrong gear even in sequential mode
▶ Launch Control, refer to page 57
▶ Automatic throttle blip
Low Speed Assistant

System limitations

The M dual clutch transmission is equipped with an overheating protection system that protects the clutch against extreme loads.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - System limitations - 1

The indicator lamp lights up yellow when the transmission becomes too warm. Avoid high engine loads and driving off frequently. When the transmission is overheated, the indicator lamp lights up red and the fuel supply to the engine is cut off. You can-

not continue driving until the transmission has cooled down.

Avoid driving off frequently with high acceleration and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmission to overheat.

In traffic congestion or at very low speeds, use the Low Speed Assistant, refer to the information below.

Low Speed Assistant

The Low Speed Assistant supports you when driving at very low speeds: the vehicle moves at walking speed and automatically controls the engine speed. You can also use the Low Speed Assistant when rocking the vehicle out of deep snow. To do so, shift between reverse gear and the forward position without pressing the brake.

Activating

  1. Engage a drive position.
  2. Briefly tap the accelerator.
    The vehicle rolls at the minimum speed.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Activating - 1

Do not press the brake continuously as this may cause the transmission to over-

Deactivating

Brake the vehicle to a stop to deactivate the Low Speed Assistant.

Selector lever positions
R L N D S + M

R: reverse gear

▶ ●: middle position

N: neutral
+: shift up manually
- : shift down manually

D/S: change between drive mode and sequential mode

Push or pull the selector lever in the required direction to engage the desired transmission position.

When you release the selector lever, it returns to its center position. The selector lever locks in position R.

The transmission position currently engaged is indicated in the instrument cluster and by LEDs on the selector lever.

Shiftlock

When the vehicle is stationary, press the brake pedal before shifting out of N, otherwise the desired gear will not be engaged.

R Reverse

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral

If the driving situation demands, e.g. when downshifting on a slippery road, the M dual clutch transmission automatically disengages and engages the clutch.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - N Neutral - 1

N engages when you open the driver's door while the engine is running, your safety belt is not fastened and you activate neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator. To drive off after closing the driver's door and fastening your safety belt, move the selector lever to position N first and then to the desired drive position.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - N Neutral - 2

N remains engaged even after the engine is switched off if you leave the remote control in the ignition lock. This function can be used in an automatic car wash, for example, refer to page 51.

S sequential mode

Shift up or down using the shift paddles or the selector lever. You do not need to lift your foot off the accelerator when doing so.

Shift from sequential mode to drive mode: press the selector lever to the right in the D/S direction.

Shift back to sequential mode: shift using the shift paddles or the selector lever, or press the selector level to the right in the D/S direction again.

On a level road, you can drive off in second gear, e.g. on slippery roads.

The M dual clutch transmission assists you in the following situations:

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.
When the vehicle stops, the transmission automatically shifts down to first gear.
Shortly before the vehicle slows down to below the minimum speed of the gear currently engaged, the transmission automatically shifts down without requiring your intervention.

Rapid downshifting: in sequential mode, you can skip several gears to achieve optimal acceleration. To do so, press the accelerator past the resistance point and pull the left shift paddle once or press the selector lever forward once.

D drive mode

In drive mode, all forward gears are shifted automatically.

Shift from drive mode to sequential mode: shift using the shift paddles or the selector lever, or press the selector level to the right in the D/S direction.

Shift back to drive mode: press the selector lever to the right in the D/S direction again.

Kick-down: to accelerate rapidly, e.g. when passing, press the accelerator down past the

resistance point. This provides maximum acceleration.

PPark

P engages automatically when you switch off the engine unless N is engaged and the remote control remains in the ignition lock, refer to page 49. As soon as you remove the remote control from the ignition lock, P engages regardless of the position of the selector lever.

Displays in the instrument cluster

270 160 300 180 200 +74 F $1:15 am 3 3 D 032050 123.8 2 1 3 mis 032050 123.8 2

1 Engaged gear 1 to 7, R, N, P
2 Selected drive program, corresponds to the number of illuminated fields, refer to Drivelogic, page 55
3 The gear currently engaged is displayed together with a D in drive mode

At very low outside temperatures, this display may not be functional. The engaged driving direction is indicated by the LEDs on the selector lever.

Changing gears

Via the selector lever

To shift up, pull back the selector lever.
To shift down, push it forward.

Via the shift paddles on the steering wheel

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Via the shift paddles on the steering wheel - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrows indicating navigation (no text or symbols)

To shift up, pull the right-hand shift paddle + briefly.
To shift down, pull the left-hand shift paddle – briefly.

Unlocking the transmission lock manually

If a power failure occurs, e.g. if the battery is discharged or disconnected, the transmission lock must be released manually, otherwise the rear wheels are blocked and the vehicle cannot be towed.

Release the transmission lock manually for towing only and forcefully apply the parking brake beforehand to prevent the vehicle from rolling. After parking the vehicle, lock the transmission lock again.

Releasing

  1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
  2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.
  3. Push the black cover forward using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 203.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Releasing - 1

natural_image Illustration of a device with a plug inserted into a container, showing internal components and a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)
  1. Insert the screwdriver into the opening of the white lever, arrow 1.

Diagram showing a device with labeled parts and directional arrows, likely illustrating a mechanical or fluid system component.

  1. Pull the screwdriver back all the way, arrow 2. The transmission lock is released.

  2. Carefully remove the screwdriver, for example to avoid accidentally engaging the transmission lock during towing.

After parking the vehicle, lock the transmission lock again. Otherwise there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.

Locking

  1. Insert the screwdriver into the opening of the white lever and press forward. The transmission lock is locked again.

  2. Fold back the black cover until it engages audibly.

  3. Clip the sleeve of the selector lever back into place.

Jump-starting and towing, refer to page 212.

Drivelogic

Various drive programs are available to you via Drivelogic.

After every change between sequential and drive mode, the program selected last in each case is active. Exception: after the first change

from sequential to drive mode, drive program 3 is active.

In drive mode

Five drive programs are available for selection, from winter program/balanced 1 to sporting and highly dynamic 5.

In sequential mode

You can choose between six drive programs, from winter program/balanced 1 to sporty puristic 6.

Program 6 is available when Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, refer to page 76. If DSC is activated, the program changes from 6 to 5.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - In sequential mode - 1

To maintain driving stability, activate DSC whenever possible.

Selecting the drive program via the button in the center console

2D 000016

Press the button repeatedly until the desired drive program is displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to page 54.

Selecting the drive program via the button on the steering wheel

You can also activate your preferred drive program via the button on the steering wheel, refer to MDrive on page 44.

You can set MDrive on the Control Display when the ignition is switched on.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"

  2. "MDrive"

  3. Select "Drivelogic:".

MDrive Drivelogic: D 5 EDC: Normal DSC: MDM POWER: Sport Plus Servotronic: Sport Shift lights: ON

  1. Turn the controller to set the drive mode or sequential mode.
    "Unchanged" retains the current settings made outside of MDrive.
  2. Press the controller to select the drive programs.
  3. Turn the controller to set the drive program.
  4. Press the controller.

Shift Lights

To achieve the best possible acceleration in sequential mode when using a sporty driving style, the Shift Lights in the instrument cluster indicate the best shift point just before the maximum engine speed is reached.

1/min x 1000 2 1 2

  1. As the vehicle approaches its maximum engine speed, the yellow LEDs 1 light up consecutively to indicate the impending shift point.
  2. At the latest, shift when the red LEDs 2 light up.

The LEDs flash when the maximum allowable engine speed is reached. When the maximum engine speed is exceeded, the fuel supply is cut off to protect the engine. Avoid engine speeds in this range at all costs.

Switching the Shift Lights on/off

For operating principle, refer to page 65.

  1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 49.
  2. Lightly push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the symbol appears in the display accompanied by the word "SET".

ON SET

  1. Press button 2.

160 200 180 200 ON OFF

  1. Use button 1 to select:

ON Shift Lights activated.
▶ OFF Shift Lights deactivated.

  1. Press button 2.

After the ignition is switched off and the engine is restarted, the status set for the remote control in use is active, refer to M Key settings on page 45.

You can set and call up the preferred status of the Shift Lights via the MDrive, refer to page 44.

Brightness of Shift Lights

The brightness of the Shift Lights can be set using the brightness level of the instrument cluster, refer to Instrument lighting on page 87.

Launch Control

Launch Control enables you to drive off with an optimal vehicle acceleration on a high grip road surface.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Launch Control - 1

Do not use Launch Control too often, as the higher loads on the vehicle lead to premature component wear.

Launch Control is available when the engine is at operating temperature, i.e. after driving continuously for at least 6 miles/10 km.

  1. Press the brake while the engine is running.
  2. Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC, refer to page 77.
  3. Select sequential mode with Drivelogic drive program 6.

  4. With the vehicle stationary, press the selector lever forward and hold. A flag symbol appears in the instrument cluster.

  5. Press the accelerator down all the way. The engine speed when driving off is controlled.

  6. If you wish, you can adjust the drive-off engine speed by up to approx. 500 rpm:

Diagram showing a satellite or spacecraft with labeled components and directional arrows, likely illustrating orbital or signal flow.

VOCOLATION

Increase the drive-off engine speed by approx. 100 rpm: press the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 1.
Decrease the drive-off engine speed by approx. 100 rpm: pull the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 2.
Reset the drive-off engine speed: press the lever upward or downward, arrows 3.

  1. The vehicle accelerates when you release the selector lever. Keep the accelerator pressed all the way down.
  2. The transmission shifts up automatically as long as the accelerator is pressed all the way down.

Launch Control only becomes available again after a certain distance has been driven.

Do not use Launch Control during the vehicle break-in period, refer to page 106.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Launch Control - 3

To maintain driving stability, activate DSC whenever possible.

M Engine Dynamics Control

With M Engine Dynamics Control you can influence how sportily your vehicle should respond to movements of the accelerator. Three programs are available to you.

"Normal" program

In the "Normal" program, the engine responds gently to accelerator movements, which is ideal for city traffic or on snow, for example.

"Sport" program

The "Sport" program provides for a more spontaneous response of the engine to accelerator movements.

"Sport Plus" program

In the "Sport Plus" program, the engine responds to accelerator movements with high spontaneity and uncompromising sportiness. The "Sport Plus" program can only be activated via MDrive, refer to MDrive on page 44.

Selecting a program

POWER

Press the POWER button to switch between the "Normal" and "Sport" programs.

For the programs "Sport" and "Sport Plus", the LED in the POWER button lights up.

You can also set and call up your preferred program via MDrive, refer to page 44.

After the ignition is switched off and the engine is restarted, the program set for the remote control in use is active, refer to M Key settings on page 45.

Turn signals/headlamp flasher

Diagram showing car interior with numbered directional arrows and vehicle icons, likely illustrating speed or traffic flow.

1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator has failed.

Indicating a turn briefly

Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.

Triple turn signal activation

Press the lever as far as the resistance point. The turn signals flash three times.

You can activate or deactivate this function. iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Lighting"

3. "Triple turn signal"

Lighting Pathway lighting: 0 s Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Welcome light

RV Triple turn signal activation is activated and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Wiper system

Diagram showing a car interior with numbered arrows indicating directional changes or system steps, likely from an automotive diagnostic or testing procedure.

1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Switching on wipers

Press the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Normal wiper speed

Press once.

The system switches to operation in the intermittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed

Press twice or press beyond the resistance point.

The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor\*

If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset.

If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

5 3

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.

Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn knurled wheel 5 up or down.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Press the button again, arrow 3.

The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor before entering an automatic car wash. Failure to do so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.

Cleaning windshield and headlamps

Pull the lever, arrow 4.

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated for a short time.

When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cleaning windshield and headlamps - 1

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.

Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.

Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are heated automatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Washer fluid

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Washer fluid - 1

Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep it away from ignition sources and only store it in the closed original container that is kept out of reach of children, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury. Comply with the instructions on the container.

Washer fluid filler neck

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Washer fluid filler neck - 1

Only refill washer fluid when the engine is cool to avoid contact with hot engine parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to personal safety.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Washer fluid filler neck - 2

natural_image Medical illustration showing a surgical tool interacting with a car engine component (no text or symbols visible)

All washer nozzles are supplied with washer fluid by the same reservoir.

Fill with water and, if required, with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Washer fluid filler neck - 3

Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure the correct concentration is maintained.

Capacity

Approx. 4.8 US quarts/4.5 liters.

Cruise control

The concept

Cruise control is available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - The concept - 1

Do not use cruise control when driving at constant speed is prevented by adverse conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.

One lever for all functions

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - One lever for all functions - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    C["3"] --> D["4"]
    E["5"] --> F["6"]
    G["7"] --> H["8"]

1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerating
2 Storing and maintaining speed or decelerating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand

Maintaining current speed

Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2. The car's current speed is stored and maintained. It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster. This function is not available when DSC is switched off.

On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient. If engine braking power is insufficient on a downhill grade, the stored speed may be exceeded.

Increasing desired speed

Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

Each time the lever is pressed lightly to the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.

The system stores and maintains the speed.

Accelerating using the lever

Accelerate slightly, increase speed steadily:

Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

Accelerate strongly, increase speed in intervals of 10:

Press the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.

Decreasing speed

Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.

Each time the lever is pulled to the resistance point, the desired speed is decreased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is achieved.

The system stores and maintains the speed.

Deactivating cruise control

Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3. The displays on the speedometer disappear.

In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:

When you brake the vehicle
When you shift or depress the clutch
When you deactivate DSC
When DSC or ABS is intervening

Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved again and maintained.

Resuming a speed stored beforehand

Press the button, arrow 4.

The stored speed is resumed and maintained.

When the ignition is switched off, the stored speed value is cleared and can no longer be called up.

Displays in the instrument cluster
1 70 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 230 50 mph 2

1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly

Everything under control

Odometer, outside temperature display, clock

240 160 270 300 180 330 200 +74°F 11:15 am 000016 001.5 1 2 3

1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature and clock, refer to Computer on page 63
3 Odometer and trip odometer

Knob in the instrument cluster

To reset the trip odometer while the ignition is switched on
To display the time, outside temperature and odometer briefly while the ignition is switched off

Units of measure

To select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as ^ F or ^ C for the outside temperature, refer to page 65.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Time, outside temperature display

Setting the time, refer to page 68.

Outside temperature warning

When the displayed temperature sinks to approx. +37 °F/+3 °C, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Outside temperature warning - 1

Black ice can also form at temperatures above Select the symbol. +37 °F/+3 °C.

You should therefore drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example, otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.

Odometer and trip odometer

Resetting trip odometer:

With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is parked

If you still want to view the time, outside temperature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the ignition lock:

Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Tachometer

1/min x 1000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

The prewarning field, arrow 1, and the red warning field, arrow 2, change in relation to the engine temperature. The permissible engine speed increases with increased engine temperature. Avoid engine speeds in the prewarning field, if possible.

Never drive at engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the engine speed is limited to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature

A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addition, a message will appear on the Control Display.

Check coolant level, refer to page 196.

Engine oil temperature

120 300 210

When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the engine oil temperature is between approx. 175°F/80°C and approx. 250°F/120°C.

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a message appears on the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

-20 -40 -20 270 100 300 180 330 200 0 1/2 900

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 16.6 US gal/63 liters.

You can find information on refueling on page 184.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Reserve

Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone, a message briefly appears on the Control Display and the cruising range for the remaining amount of fuel is displayed on the computer. Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains in the Control Display.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Reserve - 1

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.

Computer

Displays in the instrument cluster

Calling up information

+74°F 11:15am 275 m/s 000016 001.5

Press the button in the turn indicator lever.

The following items of information are displayed in the order listed:

Cruising range
Oil level, refer to Checking oil level on page 193
Average fuel consumption
Speed
No information

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Calling up information - 2

M dual clutch transmission: Outside temperature, time, cruising

range, oil level, average fuel consumption and speed appear in the top display.

To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Units of measure on page 65.

Cruising range

Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cruising range - 1

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.

You can have the average consumption for another trip displayed, refer to Displays on the Control Display below.

To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Displays on the Control Display

You can also call up the computer via iDrive; for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Vehicle Info Onboard info ✓ Trip computer Vehicle status

Displays on the "Onboard info":

Onboard info 450 Range 230 To dest. 02:15 Arrival 10.5 Cons. 075.0 Speed

Cruising range
Distance from destination
▶ Estimated time of arrival if:

A distance was manually entered into the computer, refer to information below.
A destination was entered in the navigation system*, refer to page 117.

Displays on the "Trip computer":

Trip computer 09:30 Depart. 01:20 hr Duration 140 km Distance 10.5 l/100 km Cons. 095.5 km/h Speed Reset

Departure time
Trip duration
Trip distance

Both displays show:

The average speed and
the average fuel consumption.

Resetting the fuel consumption and speed

You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption:

  1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.
  2. Press the controller again to confirm your selection.

Resetting the Trip computer

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Trip computer"

Settings and information

Operating principle

Diagram of a car dashboard with labeled parts and gauges, showing directional arrows and a speedometer reading of 17.05 mph.

3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Button for:

Selecting display
Setting values

2 Button for:

▶ Confirming selected display or set values
▶ Calling up computer information 63

Exiting displays

The outside-temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.

3. Select

"Reset" all values are reset
"Automatically reset" all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the engine is switched off
"Reset" all values are reset
"Automatically reset" all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the engine is switched off
"Reset" all values are reset
"Automatically reset" all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the engine is switched off
"Reset" all values are reset
"Automatically reset" all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the engine is switched off
"Reset" all values are reset
"Automatically reset" all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the engine is switched off
"Reset" all values are reset
"Automatically reset" all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the engine is switched off
"Reset" all values are reset
"Automatically reset" all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the engine is switched off

3. Select

3. Select

3. Select

3. Select

3. Select

3. Select

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Language/Units"

Settings Time/Date ✓ Language/Units Tone Limit Climate Lighting Door locks

  1. Select the desired menu item.
  2. Select the desired unit.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Service requirements

mls 9999 12/2010

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Service requirements - 2

The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by your BMW Service Advisor.

For certain maintenance operations, you can view the respective distance remaining or due date individually in the instrument cluster.

SERVICE- INFO

  1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 49.
  2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
  3. Press button 2.
  4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual service items.

Possible displays

Diagram showing car dashboard controls with labeled switches and gauges, including a 1x speed limit indicator.

1 Button for selecting functions
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test *
5 Front brake pads

More information

Detailed information on service requirements

You can call up detailed information about the maintenance regimen on the Control Display. iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"

Vehicle Info Onboard info ✓ Trip computer Vehicle status

6 Rear brake pads

7 Brake fluid

The sequence of displayed service items may vary. The data for the next service appointment is shown first.

  1. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.

You can request more detailed information on every entry:

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu:

Move the controller to the left.

Symbols

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Symbols - 1

No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. Please schedule a service appointment.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Symbols - 2

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering deadlines for legally required inspections\*

Make sure the date on the Control Display is set correctly, refer to page 69, otherwise the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Service required"

Vehicle status service required

  1. "§ Vehicle inspection"

Service required ok Engine oil ok Front brake pads ok Rear brake pads ok Brake fluid ok Vehicle check ok & Vehicle inspection

  1. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
  2. "Date:"
  3. Create the settings.
  4. Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.
  5. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
  6. Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.

To exit from the menu:

Move the controller to the left.

More information on the BMW Maintenance System can be found on page 197.

Automatic Service Request\*

Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your BMW center prior to a service due date.

You can check when your BMW center was notified.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"

Vehicle Info Onboard info ✓ Trip computer Vehicle status

  1. "Options"
  2. "Last Service Request"

Clock

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

Setting the time

In the instrument cluster

To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Date below.

11:15 am SET

  1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate

symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the time and the word "SET".

  1. Press button 2.

  2. Use button 1 to set the hours.

  3. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

  4. Use button 1 to set the minutes.

  5. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

  6. Press button 2.

The system accepts the new time.

Via iDrive

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed.

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

  1. "Settings"

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

Setting the time

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Time/Date"

Time/Date Time: 09:30 Format: 24 h Date: 27.05.2012 Format: tt.mrn.jjjj

  1. "Time:"
  2. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed, and then press the controller.
  3. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed, and then press the controller. The time is stored.

Setting the time format

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Time/Date"
  3. "Time:"
  4. "Format:"
  5. Select the desired format and press the controller.

The time format is stored.

Date

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

Setting the date

In the instrument cluster

To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer to "Format:" below.

1 2 1 00 00 27.05.2008 SET

  1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the date and the word "SET".
  2. Press button 2.
  3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
  4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
  5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
  6. Press button 2.

The system stores the new date.

Via iDrive

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Time/Date"
  3. "Date:"
  4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed, and then press the controller.
  5. Create the necessary settings for the month and year.

The date is stored.

Setting the date format

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Time/Date"

  3. "Format:"

Date format ✓ dd.mm.yyyy mm/dd/yyyy

  1. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Check Control

The concept

The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the systems monitored. A Check Control message involves the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster, an acoustic signal if applicable, and text messages on the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indicator and warning lamps - 1

natural_image Front view of a car dashboard with two gauges and a digital display (no visible text or symbols)

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

240 160 270 300 180 330 200 1 1 m/s 000016 001.5

⚠ indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. You can view the Check Control messages whenever it is convenient for you.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

For most Check Control messages, you can view more information later, e.g. regarding the cause of a malfunction and how to respond; refer to the information provided below.

Details Washer fluid Insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir. Refill as soon as possible, refer to Owner's Manual.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

To exit the displayed information: Move the controller to the left.

Hiding Check Control messages
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Explanatory text messages - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and battery pack (no visible text or symbols)

Press the button in the turn indicator lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified. They cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur at the same time, they are displayed in succession.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Explanatory text messages - 3

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Other messages are automatically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but are kept in memory.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Explanatory text messages - 4

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Viewing stored Check Control messages
CHECK CONTROL

  1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".

  2. Press button 2.

"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages.

If a Check Control message has been stored, the corresponding lamp comes on. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.

  1. Push button 1 to check for other messages.

  2. Press button 2.

The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Vehicle Info"

  2. "Vehicle status"

  3. "Check Control"

Vehicle status Check Control

  1. Select the text message.

Speed limit

You can enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area.

After the warning, you are only alerted to reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Limit"
  3. "Limit:"

Limit Limit 6 km/h □ Limit warning Select current speed

  1. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.
  2. Press the controller.

The speed limit is stored.

Applying your current speed as the limit

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Limit"
  3. "Select current speed"

Limit Limit 6 km/h □ Limit warning Select current speed

  1. Press the controller.

The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating/deactivating the limit

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Limit"
  3. "Limit warning"

Limit Limit 6 km/h Limit warning Select current speed

  1. Press the controller.

The limit warning is switched on.

Settings on the Control Display

Language on the Control Display

Setting the language

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Language/Units"

  3. "Language:"

Language/Units Language: Deutsch Speech mode: Default Consumption: l/100 km Distance: km Temperature: °C

  1. Select the desired language.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the voice dialog

Switch between a standard dialog and a short dialog.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Language/Units"
  3. "Speech mode:"
  4. Select the desired dialog.

Speech mode ✓ Default Short

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Warning signal volume

You can raise or lower the volume of the warning signals, e.g. the 'fasten safety belt' reminder, relative to the entertainment sound output. The warning signals have a fixed minimum and maximum volume that cannot be dropped below or exceeded.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Tone"
  3. "Volume settings"

Volume settings Speed volume Volume setting: PDC Gong

"Speed volume": speed-dependent volume control
"PDC": volume of the PDC signal tone relative to the entertainment sound output
"Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for the 'fasten safety belt' reminder, relative to the entertainment sound output

Brightness of Control Display

The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the basic setting.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Central display"

3. "Brightness"

Central display Brightness

  1. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
  2. Press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. In bright conditions, for example, the brightness control may not be clearly visible.

Technology for driving comfort and safety

Park Distance Control PDC\*

The concept

The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual indicator warn you of the presence of an object behind your vehicle. To measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors in the bumpers.

These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the center sensors.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - The concept - 1

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached slowly, as is usually the case when parking.

Avoid approaching an object at high speed, otherwise physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.

Switching on automatically

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated after approx. 1 second when you engage reverse gear. Wait this short period before driving.

Switching off automatically

After approx. 165 ft/50 m of driving or over approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system switches off and the LED goes out.

Signal tones

When nearing an object, its position is indicated correspondingly by an interval tone. As the distance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.

An interval tone is interrupted after approx.

3 seconds

▶ if you stop in front of an object that has been detected by only one of the corner sensors
▶ if you are driving parallel to a wall.

Malfunction

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Malfunction - 1

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. PDC is malfunctioning. A message appears on the Control Display. Have the system checked.

To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.

PDC with visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object is shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds. The display appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.

System limitations

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - System limitations - 1

Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are provided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system is also subject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with trailer towbars and hitches, thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs, can disappear again from the detection area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.

Driving stability control systems

Your BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.

Antilock Brake System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.

The ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 107.

Electronic brake-force distribution

The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

Brake assist

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC

DSC optimizes driving stability and traction. In addition, the system recognizes unstable driving situations such as understeering and oversteering, and helps keep the vehicle on a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine power and applying the brakes on individual wheels.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Dynamic Stability Control DSC - 1

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin again by taking risks, as this could result in an accident.

gitudinal and lateral acceleration when driving on dry surfaces, yet with reduced driving stability. Only at the absolute limit of stability does the system intervene to stabilize the vehicle by reducing engine power and applying the brakes on the wheels. In such situations, additional corrective steering maneuvers may be necessary.

M Dynamic Mode is switched off every time the engine is restarted.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Dynamic Stability Control DSC - 2

When the M Dynamic Mode is on, stabilizing measures are performed to a limited degree only. Take action yourself, otherwise there is a risk of an accident.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Dynamic Stability Control DSC - 3

To maintain vehicle stability, drive with the DSC activated and the

M Dynamic Mode deactivated whenever possible.

Activating MDM

Press the button on the steering wheel, refer to MDrive* on page 44. The MDM indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if you previously selected the M Dynamic Mode MDM in MDrive.

When the ignition is on, you can set the M Dynamic Mode via MDrive on the Control Display.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "MDrive"
  3. "DSC:"
  4. Select "M Dynamic Mode".

DSC Off ON ✓ M Dynamic Mode Unchanged

M Dynamic Mode MDM\*

M Dynamic Mode is a mode of the Dynamic Stability Control DSC that permits greater lon-

Deactivating MDM

Press the button on the steering wheel again; the MDM indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

For better control

The indicator lamp goes out briefly after the engine is started. If the indicator lamp lights up: M Dynamic Mode is activated.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - For better control - 1

The indicator lamp lights up permanently and the DSC indicator lamp flashes: M Dynamic Mode is controlling the drive and braking forces.

Deactivating DSC

DSC OFF

Press the DSC OFF button for longer than approx. 1 second; the indicator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster light up. Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions are no longer executed.

You may find it useful to briefly deactivate DSC under the following exceptional circumstances:

When driving uphill on snow-covered roads, in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered roads
When rocking a stuck vehicle free or starting off in deep snow or on loose ground
When driving with snow chains

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC

Press the DSC OFF button again; the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

For better control

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - For better control - 1

If the indicator lamp flashes: DSC is regulating the drive and braking forces.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - For better control - 2

If the indicator lamps are on: DSC is deactivated.

Electronic Damper Control EDC\*

The concept

Whenever there is a change in any significant parameter such as road surface quality or in an operating condition such as steering, braking, etc., the damping automatically adjusts to the new conditions in fractions of a second.

You can select between three programs.

"Comfort" program

Select the "Comfort" program if you want comfort-oriented control of the shock absorbers.

"Normal" program

The "Normal" program offers control that is balanced between comfort and sportiness.

"Sport" program

Select the "Sport" program if you want consistently sporty control of the shock absorbers.

Selecting a program

EDC

Press the EDC button repeatedly:

"Comfort": LED off.
"Normal": one LED lights up.

▶ "Sport": both LEDs light up.

Each time the engine is started, the program set for the remote control in use is active, refer to M Key settings on page 45.

You can also set and call up your preferred program via MDrive, refer to page 44.

Drive-off assistant

The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this.

  1. Hold the car in place by depressing the brake.
  2. Release the brake and drive off without delay.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Drive-off assistant - 1

The drive-off assistant holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the

brake is released. Drive off without delay after releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off assistant will no longer hold the car in place after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to roll backwards.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM\*

The concept

The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the individual tires while moving.

In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circumference changes and, thus, the rotating speed of the affected wheel. This change is detected and is reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirement

In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be initialized for the correct tire inflation pressure.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Functional requirement - 1

The system must be reinitialized each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-

rected or a wheel or tire has been changed.

System limitations

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - System limitations - 1

The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn the driver of sudden, severe tire damage caused by external factors, nor can it identify the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of time.

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

System has not been initialized
▶ Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
▶ Snow chains are attached

Initializing the system

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Initializing the system - 1

The initialization is completed during driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is continued automatically.

Do not initialize the system while snow chains are attached.

Using the button in the center console

  1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
  2. Press the button for approx. 4 seconds until the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up yellow. Warning lamp, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 79.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Using the button in the center console - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and warning icon (no readable text or symbols)
  1. Start to drive.
    Initialization is completed while the car is moving, without any feedback.

Via iDrive

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Reset"

Vehicle status Reset

  1. Start the engine - do not drive away.
  2. Start the initialization using "Reset".
  3. Start to drive.

The initialization is completed during the trip. "Flat Tire Monitor active" is displayed again on the Control Display.

Indication of a flat tire

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Indication of a flat tire - 1

The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.

  1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the car. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Identify the damaged tire. To do so, check the tire pressure using the M Mobility System, refer to Producing the tire inflation pressure on page 208.
  3. Repair the flat tire with the M Mobility System, refer to page 207.

Malfunction

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Malfunction - 1

The warning lamps come on in yellow. A message appears on the Control Display. The Flat Tire Monitor has a malfunction or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM\*

The concept

TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirement

In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be reset while all tire inflation pressures are correct.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Otherwise, the system may malfunction.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Functional requirement - 1

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been ged, reset the system.

System limitations

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - System limitations - 1

TPM cannot warn you in advance of sudden severe tire damage caused by out-influences.

The system does not work correctly if it has not been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indicated even though the tire inflation pressures are correct.

The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire if a wheel without TPM electronics has been mounted, or if TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio frequency.

Status indicator on the Control Display

The color of the wheels represents the status of the tires and the system.

TPM takes into account that tire pressures change while the vehicle is being driven. The tire pressures do not need to be corrected unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means of color indicators.

Green

The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the established target value.

"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.

One wheel yellow

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in the indicated tire. A message appears on the Control Display.

All wheels yellow

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in several tires. A message appears on the Control Display.

Gray

The system cannot detect a puncture.

Possible reasons for this:

TPM is being reset
Temporary malfunction caused by systems or devices using the same radio frequency
Malfunction

Resetting the system

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reset the system.

Using the button in the center console

  1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
  2. Press the button for approx. 4 seconds until the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up yellow. Warning lamp, refer to Message for low tire inflation pressure on page 80.
    The message "Resetting TPM..." appears on the Control Display for several seconds.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Using the button in the center console - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and warning icon (no readable text or symbols)

3. Start to drive.

After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The system reset is completed during your drive, and can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, the reset is continued automatically. The indicator lamp goes out after the system reset is completed.

Via iDrive

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Reset TPM"

Vehicle status Reset TPM

  1. Start the engine - do not drive away.
  2. Start the initialization using "Reset TPM".
  3. Start to drive.

The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The system reset is completed during your drive, and can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, the reset is continued automatically. On the Control Display, the tires are shown in green and "Status: TPM active" is displayed again.

If a flat tire is detected while the system is resetting and determining the inflation pressures, all wheels on the Control Display are displayed in yellow. The message "Tire low!" is shown.

Message for low tire inflation pressure

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Message for low tire inflation pressure - 1

The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds. There is a flat tire or substan-

tial loss of tire pressure.

  1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the car. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. If all four wheels are shown in yellow, identify the damaged wheel on the vehicle.
  3. Repair the flat tire with the M Mobility System, refer to page 206.

Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a workshop that is informed in the handling of TPM and that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Malfunction

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Malfunction - 1

The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continuously; the larger warning lamp comes on in yellow. On the Control Display, the wheels are shown in gray and a message appears. No punctures can be detected.

This type of message is shown in the following situations:

If there is a malfunction Have the system checked.
If a wheel without TPM electronics has been mounted
If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio frequency.

Message for unsuccessful system reset

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Message for unsuccessful system reset - 1

The warning lamp lights up yellow. A message appears on the Control Display. The system is not reset after a tire has been changed, for example.

Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, refer to page 80.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138

Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems

Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Servotronic

The concept

"Servotronic" varies the steering force required to turn the wheels as a function of the speed at which you are driving.

At low speeds, steering is assisted strongly, i.e. less effort is required to turn the vehicle. Steering assistance lessens with increasing speed.

You can select between two programs*.

"Normal" program

Select the "Normal" program if you want comfort-oriented steering, e.g. in city traffic or when parking.

"Sport" program

Select the "Sport" program if you want consistently sporty steering.

Selecting a program

You can set and call up your preferred program via MDrive, refer to page 44.

Brake force display

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Brake force display - 1

natural_image Two identical car side profiles showing front and rear views with visible engine blades (no text or symbols)

On the left: normal braking.

On the right: sharp braking.

Airbags

Diagram of a car interior with labeled parts including dashboard, steering wheel, and seatbelt

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

1 Front airbags
2 Head airbags
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests

Protective action

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Protective action - 1

Observe the adjustment instructions on page 37 to ensure the best possible personal protection.

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side air-bag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.

The airbags have been designed to not be triggered in every collision situation, e.g. not in minor accidents or rear-end collisions.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Protective action - 2

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or fy them in any other way.

Keep the dashboard and windows on the front passenger side clear, i.e. do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instruments or mobile phones.

Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other objects not specifically approved for seats with

integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the upholstered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns. In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal and disposal of airbag generators executed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to repair procedures of BMW with correspondingly trained personnel and that has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to work on the system could lead to failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury. Warning notices and information about the airbags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags

An analysis of the impression in the front passenger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied. The front and side air bags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags - 1

The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger airbags below.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags - 2

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety precautions and handling instructions under Tr porting children safely, refer to page 46.

The front and side airbags can also be deactivated by adolescents and adults sitting in certain positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting

position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position, transport the relevant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Otherwise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured.

Status of front passenger airbags
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags - 3

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with control panels and a close-up of a device (no visible text or symbols)

The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags shows the functional status of the front passenger's front and side airbags in accordance with whether and how the front passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.

The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a specially designated child-restraint system is detected, as intended, on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.

Most child seats are detected by the system, especially child seats required by the NHTSA at the time of vehicle production. After mounting a child seat, ensure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the child seat has been detected and that the front passenger airbags are deactivated.

The indicator lamp does not come on as long as a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat.

The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated.

The indicator lamp does not come on if the seat is empty.

The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Operational readiness of airbag system - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with analog gauges and a small inset showing a person walking (no text or symbols visible)

As of radio readiness, refer to page 49, the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system malfunction

Warning lamp does not light up at radio readiness or beyond.
Warning lamp remains permanently on.

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay, otherwise there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.

Lamps

Parking lamps/low beams

0 1 3 2

0 Lamps off, daytime running lamps

1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control *, daytime running lamps, welcome lamps and Adaptive Head Light*

When you open the driver's door with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off if the light switch is in position 0, 2 or 3.

Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch position 1.

Parking lamps

In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.

When the ignition is switched off and the switch is in position 1, only the outside sections of the rear lamps are illuminated, refer to page 205.

The parking lamps will discharge the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time, otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps, refer to page 87.

Low beams

The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.

Automatic headlamp control\*

When the switch is in position 3, the low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adaptive Head Light* is active. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on. You can also activate the daytime running lamps, refer to page 86. In the situations described above, the lamps then automatically switch from daytime running lamps to low beams.

The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low-beam headlamps manually under these conditions.

Welcome lamps

If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when you park the car, the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up briefly when you unlock the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating welcome lamps

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Lighting"

3. "Welcome light"

Lighting Pathway lighting: 0 s Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Welcome light

Welcome lamps are activated and are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Pathway lighting

If you activate the headlamp flasher after parking the car, with the lamps switched off, the low beams and the rear lamps come on and remain on for a certain time.

Setting or deactivating the duration

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Lighting"
  3. "Pathway lighting:"
  4. Set or deactivate the duration.

Lighting Pathway lighting: 0 s Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Welcome light

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Daytime running lamps

The daytime running lamps light up in switch position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than the low beams.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lamps

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Lighting"
  3. "Daytime running lamps"

Lighting Pathway lighting: 0 s Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Welcome light

Daytime running lamps are activated and are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Adaptive Head Light\*

The concept

Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h, e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside area of the curve.

Activating Adaptive Head Light

With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 85.

The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on automatically, depending on the steering wheel angle or turn signal indicator.

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Head Light directs light towards the front passenger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.

When you are reversing, only the corner-illuminating lamps are active and switched on on both sides.

Malfunction

The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High beams/roadside parking lamps

Diagram showing car interior with numbered directional arrows and vehicle icons, likely illustrating a traffic or navigation system.

1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps *

Roadside parking lamps, left or right

There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked.

Switching on

After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for a longer period, arrow 3.

The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time, otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the engine.

Switching off

Press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point, arrow 3.

Instrument lighting

You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are switched on.

Diagram showing a device with directional arrows and a SET button, likely representing a system or control interface.

  1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the brightness level and the word "SET".
  2. Press button 2.

200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 -1 +1 min max

  1. Push button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness level.
  2. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.

Interior lamps

The interior lamps, footwell lamps*, entry lamps*, cargo bay lamp and courtesy lamps* are controlled automatically.

The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.

To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside the car are switched off about

8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer to Start/stop button on page 49.

Switching interior lamps on/off manually

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Switching interior lamps on/off manually - 1

natural_image Diagram of a vehicle interior showing a car seat with an upward arrow pointing to a lower panel (no text or symbols present)

Interior lamps, front and rear*: To switch on and off, press the button.

To switch off the interior lamps, footwell lamps*, entry lamps* and courtesy lamps* permanently, press the button for the front interior lamps for about 3 seconds.

Reading lamps

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Reading lamps - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle showing a seatbelt with two upward arrows pointing to the seats (no text or symbols visible)

There are reading lamps at the front and rear*, next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off, press the button.

Climate

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 MAX AUTO REST 12 13 14 15

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area Draft-free ventilation 92
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of passenger compartment
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Air flow rate, manual
9 Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/Recirculated-air mode

10 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side of passenger compartment
11 Residual heat
12 Defrosting windows and removing condensation
13 Switching cooling function on/off manually
14 Rear window defroster
15 Air grill for interior temperature sensor – please keep clear and unobstructed

Automatic climate control

Comfortable interior climate

AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfortable for you.

The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 26.

Adjusting air distribution manually

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Adjusting air distribution manually - 1

The air distribution can be switched on and off manually. The air is directed to the windshield, to the upper body area and to the

footwell. Automatic air distribution adjustment is deactivated.

The current setting is briefly displayed on the Control Display when a button is pressed.

You can switch the automatic air distribution back on by pressing the AUTO button. This automatically switches on the cooling function as well.

Temperature

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Temperature - 1

Set the desired temperatures individually for the driver's and front passenger's sides.

The automatic climate control

achieves this temperature as quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Temperature - 2

When you switch between different temperature settings in quick succession, the automatic climate control does not have enough time to achieve the set temperature.

You can achieve maximum heating power with the highest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.

The lowest setting effects continuous cooling.

Maximum cooling

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Maximum cooling - 1

At outside temperatures above 32 °F/0 °C and when the engine is running, you obtain a maximum cooling effect as soon as possible.

The automatic climate control goes into recirculated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air flows at maximum rate from the vents for the upper body area. You should therefore open them for maximum cooling.

AUTO program

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - AUTO program - 1

The AUTO program adjusts the air distribution to the windshield and side windows, towards the upper

body area and into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and your temperature specifications will be adapted to outside influences as a result of seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window condensation.

The cooling is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.

Intensity of the AUTO program

Press the AUTO button repeatedly to set the intensity of the AUTO program. The current setting is displayed on the Control Display when the button is pressed.

Climate AUTO Driver

Select the intensity of the AUTO program:

Low

Medium

High

Adjusting air flow rate manually

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Adjusting air flow rate manually - 1

Press the left side of the button to reduce airflow. Press the right side of the button to increase it.

You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air flow rate with the AUTO button.

The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower may be switched off entirely to save on battery power. The display remains the same.

Switching the system on/off

With the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to switch off the automatic climate control. All displays are cleared except for the rear window defroster if it is switched on.

Press any button except REST or rear window defroster to reactivate the automatic climate control.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Switching the system on/off - 1

The recirculated-air mode is switched on when you switch off the automatic climate control. If the air quality deteriorates or the window fogs over, switch the system back on and increase the air volume.

Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/Recirculated-air mode

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/Recirculated-air mode - 1

Switch on the desired operating mode by pressing this button repeatedly:

▶ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air. If necessary, the system blocks the supply of outside air and recirculates the inside air. As soon as the concentration of pollutants in the outside air has decreased sufficiently, the system automatically switches back to outside air supply.
Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/Recirculated-air mode - 2

If condensation starts to form on the inside window surfaces during operation in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch

it off while also increasing the air flow rate as required.

The recirculated-air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods, otherwise the quality of the air inside the car will gradually deteriorate.

Via the button on the steering wheel

You can switch quickly between the recircu-lated-air mode and the previous mode using an individually programmable button on the steering wheel, refer to page 44.

Residual heat

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Residual heat - 1

The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the passenger compartment, e.g. while stopped at a school to pick up a child.

The function can be switched on when the following conditions are met:

Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off
While the engine is at operating temperature
As long as battery voltage is sufficient
At an outside temperature below 77 °F / 25 °C

The LED is lit when the function is on.

As of radio readiness, you can set the interior temperature, the air flow rate and the air distribution.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Defrosting windows and removing condensation - 1

Quickly removes ice and condensation from the windshield and front side windows.

Switch on the cooling function as well.

Switching cooling function on/off

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Switching cooling function on/off - 1

The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air before reheating it as required, according to the temperature setting. This function is only available while the engine is running.

The cooling function helps prevent condensation on the windows or removes it quickly.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started.

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function.

Rear window defroster

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Rear window defroster - 1

The defroster is switched off automatically after a certain time.

Depending on your vehicle's

equipment, the upper wires serve as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Ventilation

1 2 3 2 1

1 Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow
3 Knurled wheel for more or less cool air from the vents for the upper body area

Ventilation for cooling

Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance if it has become too hot in the car.

Draft-free ventilation

Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and not straight at you.

Ventilation in the rear

1 2 3 3

www.hfzq.com

1 Use the knurled wheel to smoothly open and close the air vents
2 Use the knurled wheel to adjust the temperature:

Turn toward blue: colder
Turn toward red: warmer

3 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW center replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance.

Parked car ventilation

The concept

The parked car ventilation provides ventilation to the passenger compartment and lowers its temperature, if necessary.

It is ready for use at any outside temperature during parked car operation.

The parked car ventilation remains switched on for approx. 30 minutes. Two different switch-on times can be preselected. The system can also be switched on and off directly.

Due to its high power consumption, it should not be switched on twice in a row without driving in between to allow the battery to recharge.

The air emerges from the air vents for the upper body area in the instrument panel. The air vents must therefore be open.

The parked car ventilation system is operated via iDrive.

Switching on/off directly

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Climate"
  3. "Activate parked-car vent."

Climate Activate parked-car vent. Activate Timer 1 Timer 1: Activate Timer 2 Timer 2:

The parked car ventilation is switched on. The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes.

Preselecting switch-on times

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Climate"
  3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
  4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

Climate ✓ Activate parked-car vent ✓ Activate Timer 1 Timer 1: 8:00 ✓ Activate Timer 2 Timer 2: -

  1. Turn the controller: set the hours.
  2. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.
  3. Turn the controller: set the minutes.

  4. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.

The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes when the system has switched on.
The respective system is switched on within the next 24 hours only. After these have elapsed, it must be reactivated.

Practical interior accessories

Integrated universal remote control\*

The concept

The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmitters for various remote-controlled devices, such as garage doors and gates or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original hand-held transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three memory buttons 1. After this, the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the signal.

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety, refer to page 95.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - The concept - 1

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the integrated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated. Comply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.

Checking compatibility

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Checking compatibility - 1

If this symbol appears on the package or in the instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, you can assume that the radio remote control device will be compatible with the integrated universal remote control.

For additional information, please contact your BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.

You can also obtain information on the Internet at:

www.bmwusa.com or

www.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Programming

Diagram of a car interior panel with labeled parts 1 and 2, showing internal components and a handle.

1 Memory buttons

2 LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters

  1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 49.

  2. When starting operation for the first time: Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons are cleared.

  3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Fixed-code hand-held transmitters - 1

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem- buttons 1 depends on the system of the active original hand-held transmitter

  1. Simultaneously press the transmit key on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step.

  2. To program other original hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the device while the ignition is switched off.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Fixed-code hand-held transmitters - 2

If the device fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmitter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly and then remains lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If it uses an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.

Alternating-code hand-held transmitters

To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the device to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization. When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Alternating-code hand-held transmitters - 1

Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.

  1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.
  2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
  3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
  4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
  5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Alternating-code hand-held transmitters - 2

If you have any questions, please contact your BMW center.

Deleting all stored programs

Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly: all stored programs are deleted.

Reassigning individual programs

  1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Reassigning individual programs - 1

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem- buttons 1 depends on the system of the active original hand-held transmitter

  1. Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control.
  2. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit key of the original hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step.

Digital compass\*

2—5ω 1

1 Adjustment button

2 Display

The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving.

Operating principle

You can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen or similar item. The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed:

▶ Press briefly: switch display on/off
3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone
6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass
9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand steering
12 to 15 seconds: set the language

Setting compass zones

Set the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle's geographic location so that the compass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Setting compass zones - 1

contour | Region | Value | |--------|-------| | North America | 1 | | Europe | 2 | | Asia | 3 | | Africa | 4 | | South America | 5 | | Australia | 6 | | Central America | 7 | | Middle East | 8 | | Southeast Asia | 9 | | Eastern Europe | 10 | | Southern Europe | 11 | | Northern Europe | 12 | | Central Asia | 13 | | Southern Asia | 14 | | Western Europe | 15 | | Middle East | 16 | | Southeast Asia | 17 | | Eastern Europe | 18 | | Southern Europe | 19 | | Northern Europe | 20 | | Central Asia | 21 | | Southern Europe | 22 | | Western Europe | 23 | | Middle East | 24 | | Southeast Asia | 25 | | Eastern Europe | 26 | | Southern Europe | 27 | | Northern Europe | 28 | | Central Asia | 29 | | Southern Europe | 30 | | Western Europe | 31 | | Middle East | 32 | | Southeast Asia | 33 | | Eastern Europe | 34 | | Southern Europe | 35 | | Northern Europe | 36 | | Central Asia | 37 | | Southern Europe | 38 | | Western Europe | 39 | | Middle East | 40 | | Southeast Asia | 41 | | Eastern Europe | 42 | | Southern Europe | 43 | | Northern Europe | 44 | | Central Asia | 45 | | Southern Europe | 46 | | Western Europe | 47 | | Middle East | 48 | | Southeast Asia | 49 | | Eastern Europe | 50 | | Southern Europe | 51 | | Northern Europe | 52 | | Central Asia | 53 | | Southern Europe | 54 | | Western Europe | 55 | | Middle East | 56 | | Southeast Asia | 57 | | Eastern Europe | 58 | | Southern Europe | 59 | | Northern Europe | 60 | | Central Asia | 61 | | Southern Europe | 62 | | Western Europe | 63 | | Middle East | 64 | | Southeast Asia | 65 | | Eastern Europe | 66 | | Southern Europe | 67 | | Northern Europe | 68 | | Central Asia | 69 | | Southern Europe | 70 | | Western Europe | 71 | | Middle East | 72 | | Southeast Asia | 73 | | Eastern Europe | 74 | | Southern Europe | 75 | | Northern Europe | 76 | | Central Asia | 77 | | Southern Europe | 78 | | Western Europe | 79 | | Middle East | 80 | | Southeast Asia | 81 | | Eastern Europe | 82 | | Southern Europe | 83 | | Northern Europe | 84 | | Central Asia | 85 | | Southern Europe | 86 | | Western Europe | 87 | | Middle East | 88 | | Southeast Asia | 89 | | Eastern Europe | 90 | | Southern Europe | 91 | | Northern Europe | 92 | | Central Asia | 93 | | Southern Europe | 94 | | Western Europe | 95 | | Middle East | 96 | | Southeast Asia | 97 | | Eastern Europe | 98 | | Southern Europe | 99 | | Northern Europe | 100 | The chart displays a contour plot with labeled values for each region. The x-axis and y-axis are not explicitly labeled but are inferred based on the contour lines, which represent the magnitude of the measured variable (e.g., median, mean, standard deviation). The legend is embedded in the contour lines.

To set the compass zone, press the adjustment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display.

To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corresponding to your current location. The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:

An incorrect compass direction is shown.

The compass direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does.
Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure

  1. Make sure that no large metal objects or overhead power lines are in the vicinity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.
  2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
  3. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at least one full circle at a speed of no more than 4 mph or 7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the display changes from C to a compass direction.

Setting right-hand/left-hand steering

Your digital compass is factory-set to right-hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with your vehicle.

Setting the language

You can set the language of the display:

Press the adjustment button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English, "E", and German, "O".

The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.

Roller sun blinds\*

Rear window blind

Diagram showing a car air conditioner unit with an Arabic flag icon and a small button labeled 'OK' pointing to the control panel.

Tap the button in the center console to raise or lower the roller sun blind.

Roller sun blinds for rear side windows

Pull loop of roller sun blind and hook onto bracket.

Do not open the window when the roller sun blind has been pulled up, otherwise there is a risk of damage at high speeds that may result in personal injury.

Glove compartment

Opening

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car showing the backrest door and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment comes on.

To prevent injury in the event of an accident while the vehicle is being driven, close the glove compartment immediately after use.

Closing

Fold cover up.

Locking

To lock the glove compartment, use the integrated key of the remote control, refer to page 26.

USB interface for data transmission

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - USB interface for data transmission - 1

natural_image Interior view of a mechanical device showing a close-up of a component with a black button and a magnified inset (no text or symbols visible)

Port for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g. music collections, refer to page 154.

Observe the following when connecting:

Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.
Do not connect USB hard disks.
Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.

Center armrest

Storage compartment

The center armrest between the front seats contains either a compartment or the cover for the snap-in adapter*, depending on the equipment version. For more information about this mobile phone base plate refer to the separate Owner's Manual.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Storage compartment - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car headrest lever with a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Opening

Press the button, see arrow.

Settings\*

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Settings\* - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car's rear seatbelt mechanism with a white arrow pointing to the grip (no text or symbols visible)

Slide the center armrest into the desired position on the driver's side.

Connection for external audio device

You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system:

AUX-IN port, refer to page 155

USB-audio interface*, refer to page 156

Storage compartments inside the vehicle

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you will find compartments beside the steering column*, in the front doors and in the center console*.

There are nets* on the front-seat backrests.

Clothes hooks

There are clothes hooks on the grab handles in the rear passenger compartment.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Clothes hooks - 1

Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks, otherwise they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.

Cup holders

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cup holders - 1

Use lightweight and shatterproof containers and do not transport hot beverages, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the accident. Do not force containers that are too large into the cup holders, otherwise damage could result.

Front
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cup holders - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car air conditioner unit with two outlets and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Opening

Briefly press the center of the cover.

Closing

Briefly press the cover in the center and push in the cup holder.

Rear\*

There are two additional cup holders in the rear center armrest.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Rear\* - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car seatbelt with a small open box placed on the side (no text or symbols visible)

Press the front of the armrest.

Ashtray, front

Opening
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Ashtray, front - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with a hand cursor pressing a button (no visible text or symbols)

Push the ridge on the cover.

Emptying
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Ashtray, front - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car gear shift lever with control panel and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Lift out the insert.

Lighter
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Ashtray, front - 3

natural_image Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a black circular component inserted, showing no text or symbols.

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Ashtray, front - 4

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns. When leaving the car, always remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.

Ashtray, rear

Opening
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Ashtray, rear - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle showing a mounted control panel with an arrow pointing to the front portion (no text or symbols visible)

Push the ridge on the cover.

Emptying

Lift out the insert.

Connecting electrical appliances

In your BMW, when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on, you can use electrical devices such as a flashlight, car vacuum cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at 12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets is available. Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Cigarette lighter socket\*

To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter out of the socket.

Socket in the center armrest

External audio device, refer to page 98.

Sockets in the rear center console*
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Socket in the center armrest - 1

natural_image Front view of a vehicle air conditioner unit with control panel and buttons (no visible text or labels)

Remove corresponding cover.

Socket in the cargo bay*
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Socket in the center armrest - 2

natural_image Close-up of a car rear door with a close-up inset showing a small electronic device (no text or symbols visible)

Open the cap.

Through-loading system\*

Opening

  1. Open the belt lock of the rear center safety belt. To do so, press the red button in the belt lock 2 using the latch plate 1.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening - 1

natural_image Technical diagram showing a cable fastening setup with labeled components (1, 2), no readable text or symbols present.
  1. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt into the specially designated fixture on the rear window shelf.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening - 2

natural_image Close-up of a black ribbon buckle with a white arrow pointing to it, against a plain background (no text or symbols)
  1. Push the corresponding head restraint down as far as it will go, refer to page 39.
  2. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the corresponding lever in the cargo bay.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening - 3

natural_image Interior view of a car showing two rearview-mounted control panels with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)
  1. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by the head restraint.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening - 4

natural_image Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat and seatbelt, with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols present)

Closing

  1. Return the rear seat backrest to its upright position and engage it.

When returning the backrest into its seating position, make sure that the seat's locking mechanism engages properly. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around in the event of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the occupants.

  1. Release the latch plate from the fixture on the rear window shelf and insert it into the belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Closing - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle showing seatbelt fastening mechanism with magnified inset (no text or symbols)

The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you with a way to attach cargo bay nets* or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 109.

Storage compartments inside the cargo bay

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the following storage spaces can be found in the cargo bay:

Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jackets, depending on vehicle equipment version
Net* for securing smaller objects, to be attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
Hooks for hanging up, e.g. shopping bags or tote bags
Rubber strap on the left trim panel for securing small objects such as a folding umbrella
Net for small objects on the right trim panel of the cargo bay

Folding up the floor panel

Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of 55 lbs/25 kg for the storage compartment under the floor panel, otherwise damage could result.

Press the floor panel up and secure it with the catch.

Lashing eyes

You will find lashing eyelets in the cargo bay for securing luggage items with nets or tensioning straps, refer to page 109.

Ski bag\*

The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6 ft 10 in/2.10 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.

Loading

  1. Fold down the center armrest.
  2. Press the button, reach into the recess and fold down the cover.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Loading - 1

natural_image Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols
  1. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski bag between the front seats and insert the skis or snowboards.

The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach.

  1. Insert the latch plate of the ski bag's retaining strap in the center belt buckle.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Loading - 2

natural_image Close-up of a hand wearing a black wrist strap, seated in a vehicle interior (no visible text or symbols)

Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

Securing cargo

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Securing cargo - 1

natural_image Close-up of a hand wearing a wrist strap, partially covered by a patterned surface (no text or symbols visible)

After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the ski bag in the manner described, otherwise it could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.

To store the ski bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.

Removing the ski bag

The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.

  1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.
  2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Removing the ski bag - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Pull out the insert, arrow 2. - 1

For more information on the various inserts available, contact your BMW cen-

ter.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 934 - © 08/08 BMW AG

Driving tips

This section provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions.

Things to remember when driving

Break-in period

Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle.

Engine and differential

Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed an engine speed of 5,500 rpm and a road speed of 105 mph/170 km/h.

Do not depress the accelerator all the way.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to 3,000 miles/5,000 km

Engine and road speeds can be increased gradually up to a traveling speed of 135 mph/220 km/h. Use the maximum speed only for brief intervals, e.g. when passing.

Transmission

The transmission begins functioning at an optimal level only after a distance of approx. 300 miles/500 km. Do not exceed engine speeds of 5,500 rpm during this period.

Tires

Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Clearance

Mind the limited clearance of the BMW M3, e.g. when driving into underground parking garages or over obstacles. If equipped with EDC*, select the "Sport" program, refer to page 77, when driving off curbs to keep clearance as even as possible. Otherwise the vehicle may be damaged.

Close the luggage compartment lid

Operate the vehicle only when the luggage compartment lid is closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could enter the interior of the vehicle.

If the vehicle must be driven with the luggage compartment lid open:

  1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
  2. Greatly increase the air volume of the automatic climate control system, refer to page 91.

Hot exhaust system

In all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to various sections of the exhaust system, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while park-

ing, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of serious personal injuries and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes, e.g. when loading the cargo bay, otherwise there is a risk of burn injuries.

Hydroplaning

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Hydroplaning - 1

When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge of water can form between tires and road surface. This situation, known as hydroplaning, means that the tire can completely lose contact with the road surface, so that neither the car can be steered nor the brake be properly applied.

The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining tread depth on the tires, refer also to Minimum tread depth on page 189.

Driving through water

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Driving through water - 1

Drive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.

Use the parking brake on inclines

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Use the parking brake on inclines - 1

On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a lengthy period using the clutch; use the parking brake instead. Otherwise greater clutch wear will result.

For more information about the drive-off assistant, refer to page 78.

Braking safely

Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.

Hills

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Hills - 1

To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system, drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if necessary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Hills - 2

M dual clutch transmission: never drive with the transmission in neutral or with the engine switched off; otherwise, engine braking action will not be present or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering. Manual transmission: never drive with the clutch held down, with the transmission in neutral or with the engine switched off; otherwise, engine braking action will not be present or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering.

Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals, otherwise pedal function could be impaired.

Corrosion on brake rotors

When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads

during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

This can also lead to a permanent loss in ride comfort and to squealing noises during braking. A loss in comfort can also be caused by extended braking with little pressure on the pedal.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

For information on brake system technology, refer to Compound brake on page 111.

When the vehicle is parked

Condensation forms while the automatic climate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

Cargo loading

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cargo loading - 1

To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This can ultimately result in a sudden blow-out.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cargo loading - 2

Make sure that no liquids are spilled or leak from their containers in the cargo bay, as this could result in damage to the vehicle.

Determining loading limit
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cargo loading - 3

natural_image Close-up of a car's front wheel and side panel showing the door and seat (no text or symbols visible)
  1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Cargo loading - 4

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading can result in damage to the vehicle and unstable driving conditions.

  1. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
  2. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.
  3. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs: 1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
  4. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
  5. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

+ ≦ Max. Load + ≦ Max. Load + ≦ Max. Load

The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.

Stowing cargo

Position heavy objects as low and as far forward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backrests.
▶ Cover sharp edges and corners.
For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Stowing cargo - 1

natural_image Two-down cutaway diagrams of a sedan showing internal structural changes (no text or labels)

Securing cargo

Diagram showing a car rearview with labeled directional arrows and numbered zones, including an inset image of a speaker.

Secure smaller and lighter items using retaining straps, a cargo bay net* or draw straps*.

Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center. Four lashing eyes are provided for attaching the cargo straps. Two are located on the cargo bay sidewalls 1, two more are on the rear cargo bay panel 2. Please comply with the information supplied with the cargo straps.

Position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endanger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerving is necessary.

Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 220, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws.

Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occupants.

Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to page 47, otherwise these could be damaged.

Roof-mounted luggage rack\*

A luggage rack mounted on the roof changes vehicle aerodynamics and handling. Exercise restraint when driving with a roof-mounted luggage rack to avoid the risk of an accident.

A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Comply with the directions given in the installation instructions.

Mounting points

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Mounting points - 1

natural_image Illustration of a car with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

The mounting points are located in the roof.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.

You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 220.

The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising the glass roof, and that objects do not project into the opening path of the luggage compartment lid.

Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.

Drive smoothly. Avoid taking corners rapidly and sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers.

BMW M3 engineering

High performance V8 engine
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - BMW M3 engineering - 1

natural_image Mechanical engine component illustration (no visible text or symbols)

The high-revving V8 engine draws a maximum power of 420 hp/309 kW and a peak torque of 295 lb ft/400 Nm from a displacement of 244 cu in/4 liters. Its spontaneous response results in a very wide effective rpm range. The maximum engine speed lies at 8,400 rpm and is electronically controlled. Due to the high engine dynamics, the maximum engine speed is limited to 7,000 rpm when the vehicle is standing.

Warming up the engine

During the warm-up phase, the high-performance V8 engine runs a little more roughly due to its emissions control system.

For technical reasons, the exhaust system sounds slightly metallic when the engine is cold.

For further information on warming up the engine, refer to Tachometer on page 62 and Engine oil temperature on page 63.

Compound brake
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Warming up the engine - 1

natural_image Technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Your BMW M3 is equipped with a high-performance brake system with perforated compound brake discs.

Due to special design features of the perforated compound brake discs, operating noise is audible during braking. However, this does not affect the brake's performance, safe operation or stability under load.

Braking correctly

To keep the brake system in optimal condition, it is advisable to apply the brakes at regular intervals as appropriate for the character of the vehicle.

Refer also to Corrosion on brake rotors on page 107.

Drive train

In your BMW M3, special emphasis was placed on the direct connection between the engine and drive. The torsionally rigid execution of the drive train results in acoustic feedback of the torque, as is typical in sports cars. Clacking sounds can arise during load changes. They do not impair functionality or shorten the lifespan of any component.

Driving on a race track

BMW recommends the following measures before driving on a race track:

Participate in a BMW driver training course
Have the vehicle checked by your BMW center

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Driving on a race track - 1

Operation on race tracks results in a higher rate of wear. The BMW M3 is not designed for use in competitive motorsports.

This wear is not covered by the vehicle warranty.

The series brake pads and wear indicator are not designed for operation on a race track. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Driving on a race track - 2

Navigation This chapter describes how you can enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you reliably to your destination. Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 934 - © 08/08 BMW AG

This chapter describes how you can enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you reliably to your destination.

General information

With the help of satellites, the navigation system is able to ascertain the precise position of the vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.

The navigation data is stored in the vehicle and can be updated using navigation DVDs.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - General information - 1

Make all entries while the vehicle is stationary

Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.

Updating the navigation data

The navigation data is stored in the vehicle and can be updated using a navigation DVD. Please contact the BMW center if you have any questions.

Inserting navigation DVD

  1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD player with the labeled side facing up.
  2. Follow the instructions on the display.
  3. Enter the authorization code of the navigation DVD and change the DVD if needed.

Displaying information on the version

  1. "Navigation"
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Navigation system version". Information on the data version is displayed.

Removing navigation DVD
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Displaying information on the version - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with air filters and control buttons (no visible text or symbols)
  1. Press button 1.
    The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

  2. Remove the DVD.

If the DVD is not ejected, the drive may be blocked. In this case, a message will appear on the Control Display.

Destination entry

In entering your destination you can select from the following options:

Entering a destination manually, see below
Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 119
Last destinations, refer to Last destinations, page 120
▶ Special destinations, refer to page 120
Entering a destination on the map, refer to page 122
Selecting home address, refer to page 120
Entering a destination by voice commands*, refer to page 123

You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 20.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Destination entry - 1

Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and other road users may be endangered.

Entering a destination manually

The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of towns or streets. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Enter address"

Navigation ✓ Enter address Address book Last destinations Points of interest Map Traffic Info Route information

The system also supports you with the following features:

If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.
You can skip the entry of state/province and locality if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.

Entering a state/province

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Enter address"
  3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed state/province.

Entering a town/city

  1. Select "Town/City/Zip Code" or the displayed town/city, or select letters.

Enter address UNITED STATES Town/City ? (BEVERLY HILLS, CA) Street House number Intersection Start guidance Route preference

Delete letters, if necessary:

To delete individual letters: Turn the controller to select and then press the controller.
To delete all letters: Turn the controller to select ◀ and then press the controller for an extended period.
To enter spaces: Select the _symbol.

The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

  1. Move the controller to the right.
  2. Select the name of the town/city from the list. The three destinations stored last are displayed.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

  1. Change to the list of town/city names.
  2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is displayed.
  3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code

  1. Select "Town/City/Zip Code" or the displayed town/city.
  2. Select the symbol.
  3. Select the digits.
  4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/cities.
  5. Highlight the postal code. A preview map is displayed in the assistance window.
  6. Select the postal code.

Entering street and intersection

  1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
  2. Enter a street and intersection as you would the town/city.

After the street you can also enter the intersection or the house number.

If there are several streets with the same name:

  1. Change to the list of street names.
  2. Highlight the street: a preview map is displayed.
  3. Select the street.

Entering a street without a destination town/city

You can also enter a street without specifying a town/city. In this case, all streets of the same name in the specified state/province are offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can negate this entry. This could be helpful in instances where the desired street does not exist in the entered town/city because it belongs to another suburb, for example.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Enter address"
  3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
  4. Change to the list of street names.
  5. "Find streets in" the state/province currently displayed.

Street in BEVERLY HILLS, CA Find streets in UNITED STATES SAN FERNANDO ROAD SAN GABRIEL BLVD. SOUTH HILLS PARK SUNSET BLVD SUNSHINE ROAD

  1. Select the letters.
  2. Change to the list of street names.
  3. Highlight the street. A preview map is displayed in the assistance window.
  4. Select the street.

Entering a house number

You can enter any house number stored in the navigation data for the street.

  1. "House number"
  2. Select the digits.

  3. Change to the list of house numbers.

  4. Select a house number or range of house numbers.

Selection after destination entry

"Start guidance". Destination guidance is started immediately.
"Route preference" refer to page 127.
"Points of Interest at dest." refer to page 120.

If a new town/city is selected during destination guidance, the current destination guidance is terminated.

Address book

To create contacts, refer to page 173.

Selecting a destination from the address book

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Address book" Contacts with addresses are displayed.

Navigation Enter address ✓ Address book Last destinations Points of Interest Map Traffic Info Route information

  1. Select a contact from the list or, if necessary, using "A-Z search".
  2. Select "Business address" or "Home address".
  3. "Start guidance"

Storing a destination in the address book

Store the destination in the address book after entering the destination.

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact"

Options ✓ Split screen Switch off display Enter address Store as new contact Add to existing contact

  1. Select an existing contact, if available.
  2. Select "Business address" or "Home address".
  3. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First name".
  4. "Store in "My Contacts"

Storing the position

Your current position can be stored in the address book.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position to contact"

Options Navigation □ Trip with several dest. Store position as contact Add position to contact ✓ Receive Traffic Info □ Dynamic guidance Navigation system version

  1. Depending on the selection, select an existing contact from the list or the type of address and enter the last and first name.
  2. "Store in "My Contacts"

Editing or deleting an address

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Address book"

  3. Highlight the entry.

  4. Open "Options".

  5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".

Using home address as destination

The home address must be stored as a destination. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home address, page 173.

  1. "Navigation"

  2. "Address book"

  3. "Home address"

Address book Check contact for nav Home address

  1. "Start guidance"

Last destinations

The last destinations are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Opening the last destinations

  1. "Navigation"

  2. "Last destinations"

Navigation Enter address Address book ✓ Last destinations Points of Interest Map Traffic Info Route information

  1. Select the destination.

  2. "Start guidance"

Editing a destination

Destinations can be edited, for example, to change the house number of an existing entry.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Last destinations"
  3. Highlight the destination.
  4. Open "Options".
  5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Last destinations"
  3. Highlight the destination.
  4. Open "Options".
  5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destinations".

Special destinations

You can search for special destinations, e.g. hotels and places of interest, and start destination guidance to this location.

The search can be narrowed by entering the location and type of special destination.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Special destinations - 1

The scope of information provided depends on the particular set of navigalata you are using.

Opening the search for special destinations

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Points of Interest"

Special destination location

Search for a special destination according to its location relative to a locality or route.

1. "Search destination"

Points of Interest Search destination ? (At destina Across all categories Several category details Start search Name, A-Z search

2. Select the location where the system is to search for the special destination:

▶ "At current location"
▶ "At destination"
"At a different destination"
▶ "Along route"

Special destination category

  1. "Category"
  2. Select "All" or a specific category, e.g. hotels or restaurants.
  3. "Route Points of Interest"*

Category details

Additional details can be displayed for some special destinations, e.g. Italian restaurants.

  1. "Points of Interest"
  2. "Category details"

Points of Interest At current location HOTEL Category details ? (Multiple...) Start search Name, A-Z search

Starting the search for special destinations

  1. "Start search" after the criteria have been defined.
  2. A list of the special destinations is displayed.

Special destinations "At current location" are listed according to their distance from the current location and are displayed with a directional arrow pointing to the destination.
Destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map display as symbols. The display depends on the map scale and the category.
Special destinations "At destination", "At a different destination", "Along route" are listed according to their distance from the location where the search is being performed.

  1. Highlight the special destination. The destination is displayed in the preview map.

  2. Select the special destination.

  3. Select the symbol. Destination guidance to the special destination is started. If a phone number is available, a connection can be established, if desired.

Entering special destinations by name

  1. "Name, A-Z search"
  2. Enter the letters. Depending on the distance, the search may take some time. The list can contain a maximum of 100 entries.
  3. Change to the list of special destinations.
  4. Highlight the special destination. The destination is displayed in the preview map.
  5. Select the special destination.
  6. Select the symbol to start destination guidance.

Displaying special destinations in the map

To display symbols of the special destinations in the map:

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Display Points of Interest"

Options Split screen Switch off display Map Settings Display Points of Interest Traffic Info categories

  1. Select the settings.

Entering the destination via the map

If you only know the location of the town or street, you can enter the destination using the map.

Opening the map

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"

A map section is displayed on the Control Display. The map shows the current position of the vehicle.

Selecting the destination

  1. Select the symbol. The interactive map is started.
  2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

12:54 Interactive map 800 ft.

Turn the controller: change the scale.
Move the controller in one direction: move the map.
First move the controller and turn it at the same time: move the map diagonally to select a destination in one of the four regions.

  1. Press the controller to display additional menu items:

Select the symbol: start destination guidance.

Specifying the street

If the system cannot recognize a street or town/city, it displays a street name in the vicinity or the coordinates of the destination.

Interactive map

In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted and the visible map section can be shifted. In

addition, pressing the controller makes further functions available:

Selected position 48°08'10"0 11°34'36"N Exit interactive map View in northern direction Display destination Display current location Find points of interest

Select the symbol: start destination guidance.
"Exit interactive map"
"View in northern direction"
"Display destination" The map section around the destination is displayed.
"Display current location" The map section around your current location is displayed.
"Find points of interest", refer to page 120.

Entering a destination by voice commands\*

You can enter a desired destination via the voice activation system. During the destination input, you can switch between voice entry and entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate the voice activation system if necessary.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Entering a destination by voice commands\* - 1

You can have the possible commands read aloud via 'Voice commands'.

Entering an address

  1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Entering an address - 1

  1. Enter address

  2. Wait for the system to prompt you for a particular part of the address.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Entering an address - 2

  1. Say the particular part of the address, e.g. State

  2. Say the name of the destination state/province in the language of the voice activation system.

Entering a town/city

The destination town/city can be spelled or entered as a complete word*.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Entering a town/city - 1

The methods of entry depend on the navigation data in use and the country and age settings.

Spelling the destination

To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is commonly spelled in the destination country. Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Spelling the destination - 1

  1. To spell the name of a town/city: Say at least the first three letters of the town/city. The more letters you say, the more accurately the system will recognize the town/city.

The system can suggest up to 20 destinations that meet your entries. Up to 7 entries at a time appear on the Control Display.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Spelling the destination - 2

The system suggests a location.

  1. Select location:

To select highlighted town/city: 'Yes'
To select other town/city: No
▷ Select an entry, e.g. >Entry ...
To re-enter the town/city: 'New entry'

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.

Entering the destination as a complete word

The names of towns/cities and streets located in the region in which the language of the voice activation system is spoken can be entered as an entire word.

Example: to enter a destination in a state/province as a complete word, the system language must be English.

Speak smoothly and at normal volume, and avoid excessive emphases and pauses.

  1. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city of destination.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Entering the destination as a complete word - 1

  1. Say the name of the destination town/city.

The system may suggest multiple destinations that meet your entries.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Entering the destination as a complete word - 2

The system suggests a location.

  1. Select location:

To select highlighted town/city: 'Yes'
To select other town/city: No
▷ Select an entry, e.g. >Entry ...
To enter the town/city by spelling: 'Spell city'

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Entering the destination as a complete word - 3

Identical-sounding towns/cities that cannot be distinguished by the system are compiled in a separate list and shown as a destination followed by three dots.

If necessary, select this entry with >Yes<. Then select the desired town/city from that list.

Entering street and house number

The street is entered in the same way as the destination town/city.

To enter the house number:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Entering street and house number - 1

  1. House number<

  2. Say the house number.

Starting destination guidance

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Starting destination guidance - 1

Start guidance<

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Storing destinations

The destination is added to the destination list and is displayed in the list of last destinations.

Trip planner

The trip planner can be used to plan a trip with several legs to different destinations.

New trip

Various intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. Open "Options".
  3. Activate "Trip with several dest.".

Options Navigation Trip with several dest. Store position as contact Add position to contact Receive Traffic Info Dynamic guidance Navigation system version

  1. "Trip list".
  2. "New trip"

Entering intermediate destinations

  1. "Enter first dest. in the trip", if applicable, "Another destination in the trip"
  2. "Enter address using:"
  3. Select the type of destination entry and enter the intermediate destination.

New destination Enter address using: Enter address Address book Last destinations Points of interest

  1. Select the location where the intermediate destination is to be inserted: "As first destination", "As last destination" or "Insert within list".
  2. If applicable, select "Another destination in the trip".

Starting the trip

After entering all of the intermediate destinations, open a stored trip directly via "Start guidance" or via "Trip list".

Storing a trip

In the trip planner, created trips can be stored in the trip list.

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Store trip"
  3. Enter the letters.

The trip is stored in the trip list under the entered name.

Changing the trip direction

Intermediate destinations are displayed in reverse order in the list. This function is not available for imported trips.

  1. "Trip list"
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Arranging the order of intermediate destinations

This function is not available for imported trips.

  1. "Trip entry"
  2. Select an intermediate destination.
  3. "Reposition dest. in the trip"
  4. Move the intermediate destination to another position in the list.

Deleting an intermediate destination

This function is not available for imported trips.

  1. "Trip entry"
  2. Select an intermediate destination.
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Delete dest. in the trip"

Deleting a trip

  1. "Trip list"
  2. Select the desired trip.
  3. Open "Options".

  4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".

Opening the trip list

The stored trips are listed in alphabetical order in the trip list.

  1. "Trip planner"
  2. "Yes"
  3. "Trip list"
  4. Select a trip.

Importing trips

A maximum of 30 trips with at most 50 intermediate destinations per trip can be stored.

Connect the USB device to the USB interface in the glove compartment.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Trip planner"
  3. "Yes"
  4. "Trip list"
  5. Highlight the trip.
  6. Open "Options".
  7. Select "Import trip".
  8. "USB device" or "BMW Search" *
  9. "OK"

Terminating trip planning

To return to the direct entry of destinations:

  1. "Navigation"
  2. Open "Options".
  3. Deactivate "Trip with several dest.".

Word-matching principle

The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of towns or streets. The system runs ongoing checks, comparing your destination entries with the data stored in the vehicle as the basis for instant response. The benefits for you include:

Names of towns entered may differ from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another country.

Example:

Instead of the German spelling "München" you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".

When you are entering the names of towns and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous identification.
The system offers only those letters for selection of name entries that are stored in the vehicle. Thus, entry of erroneous or unregistered names is impossible.

Destination guidance

Starting destination guidance

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Enter address"
  3. Select the destination.
  4. "Start guidance"

After the route is calculated, the route is displayed in the map on the Control Display.

Terminating destination guidance

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"
  3. Select the symbol

Continuing destination guidance

If the destination was not reached at the end of the last trip, the system asks whether it should continue destination guidance.

Select "Resume guidance" or "Stop guidance".

Route criteria

General information

You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like during destination entry or during destination guidance.

The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is taken into account, e.g. whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a result, the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing route criteria

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"
  3. "Route preference"

  4. Selecting a criterion:

"Fast route": time-optimized route, which is a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads
"Efficient route": optimized combination of the fastest and shortest roads
"Short route": short distance, irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be
"Alternative routes": other suggested alternative routes

12:15 Short route + 20:2 820 km Alternative routes 20:06 866 km 20.59 907 km □ Avoid highways □ Avoid toll roads

  1. Select additional route criteria, if desired. Where possible, the selected criteria will be avoided on the route.

"Avoid highways"
"Avoid toll roads"
"Avoid ferries"
"Avoid area": define an area that the route is to avoid

The setting applies to the current route and to the planning of future routes.

Dynamic destination guidance

"Dynamic guidance" is switched on: The route is automatically changed in the event

of traffic obstructions. The system does not point out traffic obstructions along the original route.

Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Dynamic guidance"

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Dynamic destination guidance - 1

If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads" or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are selected, route calculation may take considerably longer.

Route

General information

Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, different views of the route are available during destination guidance.

▶ Map display
Arrow display
▶ Display of the streets and towns/cities on the route.

Displaying a list of the streets or towns/cities on the route

When destination guidance is started, a list of the streets and towns/cities on the route is displayed. The driving distances and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section.

▶ Display a list of the streets and towns/cities on the route.
▶ Display the traffic bulletins and the driving distance for each route section.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Route information"
  3. Highlight a section.
    The section is displayed in the preview map.

Bypassing a section of the route

During destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.

A section of the route up to 32 miles/50 km in length can be bypassed.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Route information"
  3. "New route for:"

Route information New route for

  1. Turn the controller: enter the desired number.

If the route section should no longer be bypassed: "Remove blocking"

Gas station recommendations

The vehicle calculates the range and recommends several gas stations along the route.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Route information"
  3. "Recommended refuel"
  4. Select a gas station.
  5. Select the symbol to start destination guidance.

Destination guidance through voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off

Voice instructions can be switched on or off during destination guidance.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"
  3. Select the symbol

The voice instructions are switched on.

For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a programmable memory key, refer to page 20.

Repeating a voice instruction

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"
  3. Select the symbol twice.

Adjusting volume for voice instructions

The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

  1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if necessary.
  2. Turn the button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Adjusting volume for voice instructions - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Map display

Map display

You can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"

12:54 Interactive map 800 ft.

The following functions are directly available in the map display:

1 Starting/stopping destination guidance
2 Switching voice instructions on/off
3 Changing route criteria or selecting route alternatives
4 Special destinations
5 Displaying traffic bulletins
6 Interactive map
7 Settings for the map display
8 Changing scale

Information in the map display:

Time, entertainment source, sound output, map orientation
Distance from destination, estimated time of arrival, if destination guidance is active.
Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in color.

Viewing the map

  1. Select

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Viewing the map - 1

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Viewing the map - 2

symbol.

  1. Select a setting:

"View facing north"
"View in direction of travel"
"Perspective view"
"Arrow display"
3. Press the controller.

Changing scale

  1. Select the symbol.
  2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.

Automatic scaling of the map

In the map display facing north, turn the controller in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the map scale.

The map shows the entire range from your location to the destination.

Settings for the map display

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Settings"

▶ Optimized view "Night mode"
Optimized view with spatial display: "Perspective view in 3D" prominent areas are shown in the map.

Split screen settings

The map settings for the split screen can be created separately from the main screen.

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Split screen"
  3. Move the controller to the right until the split screen is selected.
  4. Press the controller.

  5. Select the settings:

"View facing north"
"View in direction of travel"
"Perspective view"
"3D exit ramps"*

You can display the traffic bulletins from radio stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Message Channel) of a traffic information service.

This information from the traffic information service is continuously updated on the basis of measurement data from traffic control centers and information on traffic congestion.

During destination guidance, traffic bulletins that are relevant to areas along the route are automatically displayed and taken into account in the route planning. You can open all traffic bulletins manually via iDrive.

The traffic bulletins are shown in the map display.

Activating/deactivating reception

  1. "Navigation"
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Receive Traffic Info"

In many metropolitan areas you can receive traffic information broadcast by radio stations.

The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic control centers and the traffic information is updated periodically.

During destination guidance, the traffic bulletins relevant to your planned route are automatically shown. Whether destination guidance is active or not, you can have the traffic information displayed in the map view or in the traffic info list.

Traffic bulletins in a list

A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via the menu or map display.

Opening the traffic bulletins

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Traffic Info"

First, the traffic bulletins on the planned route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle position.

  1. Select a traffic bulletin.

Additional information can be displayed for some traffic bulletins:

  1. Select the symbol.
  2. Additional information is displayed.

94 → PASSAU AS München-Steinhau... AS München-Daglfing 1 km stockender Verkehr 0,6 km → 0,1 km

  1. To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

Highlighting traffic bulletins

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Settings"
  5. "Traffic Info map"

The map is optimized for displaying the traffic bulletins. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.

Map options Night mode Perspective view in 3D Traffic info map

Symbols in the map display

The appearance of the symbols indicating a traffic obstruction depends on the scale and the position of the traffic obstruction relative to the route.

Smaller map scale, e.g. 1 mile/2 km: white sign with the traffic obstruction symbol
Larger map scale, e.g. 50 miles/100 km: white sign with an arrow in the relevant direction

Additional information in the map display

When using a smaller map scale, the traffic obstructions are displayed as gray bars at the edge of the calculated route.

Filtering of traffic bulletins

You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be displayed by the system:

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Map"
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Traffic Info categories"

Categories Roadwork Weather information Parking and public transprt. Closed roads

  1. Select the filter:

Traffic bulletins of the selected category are displayed.

Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route are always displayed.
For your own safety, traffic bulletins that notify you of potentially dangerous situations, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hidden.

Traffic bulletins during destination guidance

System response will vary depending on whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected. Information on sources of great danger, such as wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of the setting.

Traffic obstructions

The system calculates the optimized route, taking into consideration traffic obstructions and road types.

Selecting a detour

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Traffic Info"
  3. Select the traffic obstruction that is to be taken into consideration.
  4. "Detour"

Taking into consideration all traffic obstructions

  1. "Navigation"
  2. "Traffic Info"
    First, the traffic bulletins on the planned route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle position.
  3. Select "Recommended detour".

This information is displayed even if you have called up another application on the Control Display.

What to do if ...

What to do if ...

The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in a poor reception area, or the system is in the process of determining the position. Try again later.
The destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for the town or city that has been entered. Input any street in the selected town/city and start destination guidance.
The letters for a destination cannot be selected during destination entry?
The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.
Voice instructions are no longer issued before intersections during destination guidance?
The area has not yet been fully recorded
The system does not react to entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes up to 15 minutes before the system is once again operational.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - What to do if ... - 1

natural_image Black-and-white photo of hands playing piano keys, no visible text or symbols on the keys or background

Entertainment Operation of the radio, CD equipment and external audio devices as well as their tone settings are described in this chapter. Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 934 - © 08/08 BMW AG

Entertainment

Operation of the radio, CD equipment and external audio devices as well as their tone settings are described in this chapter.

On/off and tone

The following audio and video sources share the same control elements and adjustments:

Radio

CD player

CD changer*

Video

External devices, e.g. MP3 player

Controls

The audio and video sources can be controlled using the:

▶ Buttons near the CD player

iDrive

Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10

Programmable memory keys, refer to page 20

Voice activation system

Buttons near the CD player
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, volume

Press: switch on/off. When you switch on the unit, the last set radio station or track is played.

Turn: adjust volume.

2 Elect the CD

3 CD/DVD drive

4 F M / A M : change the radio station wave-band

5 M O D E : change the audio and video sources

6 Station scan/track search

Change the radio station.

Select the track for CD player and CD changer.

Switching on/off

In order to switch the entertainment sound output on and off:

Press button 1 next to the CD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.

If equipped with a single drive, the sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes after the ignition is switched off.

For sound output, switch the unit back on.

Adjusting volume

Turn button 1 next to the CD player until the desired volume is obtained.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Tone control

You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase.

The tone settings are applied to all audio sources.

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Opening the tone settings

  1. "Radio" or "CD/Multimedia"
  2. "Tone"

Radio FM AM Satellite radio Presets Weather band ✓ Tone

Treble, bass, balance, fader

▶ "Balance": left/right volume distribution
▶ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

  1. Select the desired tone setting.

Tone Treble - + Bass - + Balance L R Fader F R Equalizer L7 Surround Volume settings

  1. To adjust: turn the controller.
  2. To store: press the controller.

Equalizer\*

You can set individual sound frequency ranges.

  1. "Equalizer"
  2. Select the desired setting.

Equalizer 100 Hz - + 200 Hz - + 500 Hz - + 1 kHz - + 2 kHz - + 5 kHz - + 10 kHz - +

To adjust: turn the controller.
To store: press the controller.

Individual High-End Audio System\* or LOGIC7\*

You can choose between stereo and surround.

"L7 Surround"

"Surround"

Tone Treble - + Bass - + Balance L R Fader F R Equalizer L7 Surround Volume settings

Multi-channel playback is simulated when playing back an audio track in stereo.

Surround is automatically activated or deactivated, depending on the audio track selected.

LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the Harman International Group.

Volume

"Speed volume": speed-dependent volume control
"Navigation"*: voice instructions from the navigation system
"PDC": volume of the PDC signal tone relative to the entertainment sound output
"Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for the 'fasten safety belt' reminder, relative to the entertainment sound output

Adjustments

  1. "Volume settings"
  2. Select the desired volume setting.

Volume settings Speed volume Volume setting: PDC Gong

  1. To adjust: turn the controller.
  2. To store: press the controller.

Resetting tone settings

You can reset all tone settings to the default setting.

"Reset"

Radio

Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands.

Selecting a station

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Selecting a station - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with two fans and a control panel, showing no visible text or symbols.

Press the button if the sound output is switched off.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Radio"

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

  1. "FM" or "AM"

  2. Call up the desired station.

FM Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96.3 ✓ Klassik 100.0 MHz 101.3 MHz

Changing stations

Turn the controller.

or

Press the button for the corresponding direction.

or

Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.

Frequency, selecting manually

In "Manual", you can set stations that can be received in addition to those already being displayed.

  1. "FM" or "AM"

  2. "Manual"

  3. Call up the frequency.

FM manual 96 98 100 94 102 92 MHz 104 90 106 88 108

To store the station: press the controller.

Storing stations

Via iDrive

  1. "FM" or "AM"

  2. Select the desired station.

FM Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96.3 ✓ Klassik 100.0 MHz 101.3 MHz

  1. Press the controller again.

  2. Select the desired memory location. The station is stored.

The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via programmable memory keys

You can store a station on the programmable memory keys, refer also to page 20.

  1. Select a station.
  2. ... Press the desired button for a longer period.

Radio Data System RDS

On the FM waveband, additional information is broadcast via RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, it may take some time before the station names will appear in the display.

Switching RDS on/off\*

  1. "FM"
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "RDS"

Options Split screen Switch off display FM HD RDS Radio

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

High Definition Radio\*

Many stations transmit analog and digital signals. You can receive these stations digitally for improved sound quality.

A digital radio network must be available to be able to receive digital stations.

Switching digital radio reception on/off

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "FM" or "AM"
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "HD radio"

This symbol is displayed when a station is received digitally.

Some stations do not transmit the digital and analog signals simultaneously. If you are in an area in which digital reception of the selected station is not possible continuously, reception will alternate between analog and digital. This can cause repetitions or interruptions. In this case it may be preferable to switch off digital reception.

Displaying additional information

With digital stations, additional information on the current track can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Station info"

Selecting a substation

  1. Select a station.
  2. Press the controller.
  3. Select the substation.

Stored stations

Storing a station

  1. "Presets"
  2. "Store station"

Store station 1 Hit Radio FM 2 Classic Radio FM 3 Chart Radio FM 4 News Radio FM

  1. Select the desired station.
  2. Select the desired memory location.

Deleting a station

  1. Select a station.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Delete entry"

Satellite radio\*

You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality.

The channels are offered to you in predefined packages. To receive the channels of your choice, you must have the corresponding packages enabled.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Satellite radio\* - 1

With this new technology, signal losses can occur from time to time and result in interruptions.

Enabling or disabling channels

Enabling the channels

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Ensure that reception is reliable. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky.
  2. "Satellite radio"
  3. Open "All Channels" or the desired category.

Category All Channels Pop Rock Elec/Dnc Hip-Hop Country JazzCiscl

  1. Select the channel.

  2. If the channel has not yet been enabled, then a phone number and the ESN electronic serial number are displayed.

Subscr to Sirius subscribe ESN: 020 1/3 1/1 411 1-888-539 SIRIUS

  1. Call the phone number to have the channel enabled.

The channels can be disabled again via this phone number.

Disabling channels

The channels can be disabled by phone. To do so, have the electronic serial number ESN ready.

  1. "Satellite radio".
  2. Open "All Channels" or the desired category.

Category All Channels Pop Rock Elec/Dnc Hip-Hop Country JazzCiscl

  1. Open "Options".
  2. The electronic serial number is displayed.
  3. Call Sirius to have the channel disabled.

Selecting a channel

Selecting a channel

  1. "Satellite radio"
  2. Select "All Channels" or the desired category.

Satellite radio Snow Patrol Chating Cars All Channels 001 Hits 1 ✓ 002 StarLite 003 Love 004 Movin EZ

  1. Select the desired channel.

Storing a channel

  1. "Satellite radio"
  2. Open "All Channels" or the desired category.
  3. "Store Channel".
  4. Call up the desired memory location.

The channel is stored. The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed again after a short time.

Displaying information about another channel

Information about a track currently being played on another channel can be displayed.

  1. Highlight the channel on which you wish to display information.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Channel info"

Options Split screen Switch off display Hits 1 Store Channel Channel info Satellite radio

Changing the channel using the buttons below the CD/DVD drive

Press the button for the corresponding direction.

The system switches to the next enabled channel.

Notes

If more than 4 seconds go by and no signal is received, a message appears on the Control Display.

Under some circumstances, e.g. depending on environmental or topographic conditions, it may not be possible to receive a signal. The satellite radio cannot influence this. A signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to high-rise buildings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other strong sources of radio interference.

Reception usually resumes as soon as the signal becomes available again.

CD player and CD changer\*

CD/DVD playback
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - CD player and CD changer\* - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with two fans and a central drive (no visible text or symbols)

Inserting a CD/DVD

Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the printed side up. The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically.

Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. When playing CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, it can take the player approx. 1 minute to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.

playable formats

CD/DVD player

DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video
CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD, SVCD
Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC CD changer*
CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA

Start playback

Via iDrive

Fill and insert the CD magazine, refer to page 149.

To start playback if a CD is already located in the player or changer:

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "CD/Multimedia"

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

  1. "CD/DVD"
  2. Select the desired CD or DVD:

CD/DVD ✓ Best off Brothers in Arms CD-Rom Mezzanine Reload Beautiful Black Market Music

Ejecting a CD

Press the button next to the CD player. The CD emerges slightly from the drive.

Symbol Function

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Symbol Function - 1

CD/DVD player

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Symbol Function - 2

CD changer

Audio playback

Selecting a track

Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track is reached.

Audio CDs

Select the desired track to begin playback.

Audio CD Bruce Springsteen Magic 00:28 01/14 Store in vehicle Nowhere You'll Be Comin' Down Living In The Future

CDs with compressed audio files\*

Depending on the data, some letters and numbers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed correctly.

  1. Select the directory, if necessary.

To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

CD Santana Supernatural 00:38 223/249 Prince ✓ Santana Sportfreunde Stiller Tom Jones

  1. Select a track and press the controller.

CD Santana Supernatural 00:08 • 223/249 Store in vehicle (Da Le) Yaleo ✓ Africa Bamba Corazon Espinado (Fe...

Displaying information about the track\*

If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically:

Santana Supernatural 00:38 223/249 Prince ✓ Santana

▶ Artist
Album title
Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
Track file name

Random play sequence

The tracks on the current CD are played once each in random order.

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Random"

Options Switch off display CD/DVD Display Owner's Manual CD/Multimedia □ Random Music import/export

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the directories and the tracks contained therein are played back in random sequence.

Random mode is switched off if the audio source is changed and the ignition is switched off.

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.

Video playback\*

Country codes

Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the information on your DVD.

Code Region

1USA,Ca
2Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Africa
3Southe
4Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand
5Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China

Start playback

The video image is displayed on the Control Display up to a vehicle speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h.

In some country versions, playback is either not possible at all or only possible with the parking brake set.

DVD video

  1. "CD/DVD"
  2. Select a DVD with video content.
  3. "FVD menu"

DVD menu

  1. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

VCD/SVCD

  1. "CD/DVD"
  2. Select a CD with video content.
  3. "Select track"

Select track

  1. ^n Select the desired track.

The CD is started.

aVideo menu t A s i a

To open the Video menu:

  1. Turn the controller during playback.
  2. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.

The Video menu is displayed:

Symbol Function

DVDOpen the DVD menu*
Start playback
||Pause
Stop
Next chapter/next track
Previous chapter/previous track
Fast forward
Reverse

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases every time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu

  1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the video menu.
  2. "DVD menu"

The DVD menu is displayed. The display depends on the contents of the DVD.

To select menu items: move and press the controller.

To change to the Video menu: turn the controller and select "Back".

DVD/VCD settings

For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; refer also to the information on your DVD.

Language\*

  1. Turn the controller during playback.
  2. Open "Options".

  3. "Audio/Language"

Options Switch off display DVD video Audio/Language Subtitles Display settings Additional options CD/Multimedia

  1. Select the desired language.

The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

Subtitles\*

Subtitles can be selected if they are contained on the DVD.

  1. Turn the controller during playback.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Subtitles"
  4. Select the desired language or "Do not display subtitles".

Subtitles Do not display subtitles ✓ German English

Brightness, contrast, color

  1. Turn the controller during playback.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Display settings"

  4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

Display settings Brightness Contrast Color

  1. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed and then press the controller.

Zoom

Display the video image on the full screen.

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Additional options"
  3. "Zoom mode"

  4. Turn the controller during playback.

Options Zoom mode Select chapter Viewing angle Main menu Back

Selecting track

DVD video:

  1. Turn the controller during playback.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Additional options"
  4. "Select chapter"
  5. Select the desired track.

VCD/SVCD

  1. "Select track"

  2. Select the desired track.

Camera angle\*

The camera angle depends on the DVD.

  1. Turn the controller during playback.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Additional options"
  4. "Viewing angle"
  5. Select the desired camera angle.

Opening the main menu, back

These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.

CD magazine

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the left side panel in the cargo bay.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - CD magazine - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car back panel with a magnified inset showing a camera lens inserted into the lock (no text or symbols visible)

Removing the CD magazine

To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine, you must first remove it from the CD changer:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Removing the CD magazine - 1

natural_image Two views of a mobile phone showing front and side views with no visible text or symbols
  1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
  2. Press the button, arrow 2.

The CD magazine is ejected.

Push the magazine back in after at least 2 seconds have passed so that the inserted CDs can be read in again.

Inserting/removing CDs from the CD magazine

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Inserting/removing CDs from the CD magazine - 1

natural_image Illustration of a black rectangular CD or DVD with an open disc and a paper clip, no text or symbols present.

When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.

Inserting CDs:

Insert one CD per compartment with the labeled side up.

Removing CDs:

Pull out the desired compartment and take out the CD.

Inserting the CD magazine

INSERT IN THIS DIRECTION 1 2 1

Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direction of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.

The CD changer automatically reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.

Notes

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Notes - 1

BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result.

Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause

irreparable damage to the device.

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no longer eject.

Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD ^Plus , otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.

General malfunctions

BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity

High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs

If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/DVDs, one of the following factors may be the cause.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs

Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g. inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen designed for this purpose.

Damaged CDs/DVDs

Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.

Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 122 °F/50 °C, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection

CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/

DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

Care

Clean the reflective signal side of CDs/DVDs as needed by wiping it with a commercially available cleaning tissue in straight lines from the center of the disc outwards.

Music collection

Storing music

Music tracks from CDs and DVDs can be stored in the music collection in the vehicle and played from there.

Audio CD: tracks are converted into a compressed audio format when they are stored. The CD is stored in the vehicle as an album. If available, information on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.
CDs with compressed audio files: the entire CD is stored in the vehicle as an album. After storing, the tracks and directories can be deleted individually. Files are only stored in the WMA, MP3, and AAC formats. Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored in the vehicle but cannot be played back.

Storing files from CDs/DVDs

  1. Insert the CD into the CD player.
  2. "CD/DVD"
  3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
  4. "Store in vehicle"

Audio CD Unknown artist Unknown album 00:28 01/14 Store in vehicle Track 01 Track 02 Track 03

The music collection is displayed and the first track on the CD is played back. During the storage process, the tracks are played in sequence.

Observe the following during the storage process:

Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD from the CD/DVD player, as this will interrupt the storage process. You can switch to the other audio sources without interrupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD that have already been stored can be called up.

Interrupting storage

  1. "CD/DVD"
  2. "Storing..."

CD/DVD Storing... Best off Irothest in arms Mezzanine Audio CD Reload Beautiful

  1. "Cancel storing"

The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process

"Continue storing"

Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of the track at which storage was interrupted.

Album information

During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this information is available in the vehicle database or on the CD.

If no information is stored with the tracks, you can update the entire album information via BMW Search*, refer to page 176.

Gracenote® technology

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.

Storing from a USB device

The entire content of the USB device is stored in the music collection as an album. After storing, the tracks and directories can be deleted individually.

  1. Connect the USB device to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
  2. "Music collection"
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Music import/export"
  5. "Import music (USB)"

Import/export (USB) Import music (USB) Music collection management Backup music on USB device Restore music from USB

Music is stored in the vehicle. The entire content of the USB device is stored as a separate album and is named automatically.

Music, playing

All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album.

  1. "CD/Multimedia"
  2. "Music collection"
  3. "Music search"

Music collection Music search Current playback Top 50 Audio-CD 1 Frank USB 1 LIEBLINGSSONGS

  1. Select the desired category.

Music search Genre? (All genres) All artists All albums All tracks Start play New search

All entries are displayed in a list.

  1. To select the desired entry:

Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired entry.

or

▶ Select the desired entry from the list.

  1. Select additional categories if desired.

The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order.

Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

"Start play"

"New search"

Current playback

The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search or the album selected last.

  1. "Current playback"

Music collection Music search Current playback Top 50 Audio-CD 1 Frank USB 1 LIEBLINGSSONGS

  1. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Top 50

List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.

  1. "Top 50"

  2. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Albums

All stored albums, listed in order of their storage dates. Symbols indicate the format.

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

Select the desired album.

Music collection Music search Current playback Top 50 Audio-CD 1 Hits Frank LIEBLINGSSONGS

Depending on the album, the tracks or the sub-directories of the album are displayed. The first track is played automatically, if possible.

To select tracks, change directories if needed. To go up one level in the directory, move the controller to the left.

Random play sequence

All tracks of the selection are played back in random order.

  1. Open "Options".

  2. "Random"

Options Free memory Delete music collection CD/Multimedia Random Music impart/export

Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album

The name of the album, if available, is automatically entered when the album is stored. If the name is unknown it can be changed later if needed.

  1. "CD/Multimedia"

  2. "Music collection"

  3. Highlight the album.

  4. Open "Options".

Options Audio-CD 1 Rename album Delete album Music collection Music import/export Free memory Delete music collection

  1. "Rename album"

  2. Select the letters individually.

Deleting an album

An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played.

  1. Highlight the album.

  2. Open "Options".

  3. "Delete album"

Deleting a track and directory

  1. Highlight the directory or track.

  2. Open "Options".

  3. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"

Album information\*

If audio CDs are stored without information, the information can be updated for each individual audio CD via BMW Search, if desired.

  1. Highlight the desired album.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Update album data online"

Options Audio-CD 1 Rename album Update album data online Delete album Music collection Free memory

Free memory capacity

Display the free memory capacity in the music collection.

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Free memory"

Music collection

Backing up the music collection

The entire music collection can be stored on a USB medium. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device.

Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup during a long trip.

  1. Start the engine.
  2. Connect the USB device to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
  3. "CD/Multimedia"
  4. "Music collection"
  5. Open "Options".

  6. "Music import/export"

Options Free memory Delete music collection CD/Multimedia Select rear source Random Music import/export

  1. "Backup music on USB device"

Import/export (USB) Import music (USB) Music collection management Backup music on USB device Restore music from USB

Storing the music collection in the vehicle

When storing music from the USB medium, the existing music collection in the vehicle is replaced.

  1. "CD/Multimedia"
  2. "Music collection"
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Music import/export"
  5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection

  1. "CD/Multimedia"
  2. "Music collection"
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Delete music collection"

AUX-IN port

You can connect an external audio device, for instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system. You can adjust the tone using iDrive.

Connecting

Lift up the center armrest.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Connecting - 1

natural_image Close-up of a white interior space with a digital camera module and a keyboard inserted (no visible text or symbols)

Connection for audio playback:

TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm

To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system, connect the headset or line-out port of the external device to the AUX-IN port.

Starting audio playback

Connect the audio device, switch it on and select a track. Operate the system on the audio device.

Via iDrive

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "CD/Multimedia"
  2. "AUX (front)"

Adjusting volume

The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If the volume varies greatly from the other audio sources, it makes sense to adjust the volume to the same level.

  1. "CD/Multimedia"
  2. "AUX (front)"

  3. "Volume"

AUX (front) AUX active Volume - 10000 +

  1. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and then press the controller.

USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio interface\*

Connectable devices

iPod/iPhone, mobile phone or USB devices (MP3 player, USB flash drive). They can be operated via iDrive.

Standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format can be played.

Due to the large number of different audio devices/mobile phones available on the market, it cannot be ensured that every audio device/mobile phone is operable on the vehicle.

Ask about suitable audio devices/mobile phones at your BMW center.

Connecting

Lift up the center armrest.

2 安全 1

1 AUX-IN port for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm

2 USB-audio interface

iPod/iPhone

To connect the iPod/iPhone, use the BMW cable adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone. For more information, contact your BMW center or go to the Internet: www.bmw.com

To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system, connect the iPod/iPhone to ports 1 and 2.

The menu structure of the iPod/iPhone is supported by the USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio interface.

USB storage device

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - USB storage device - 1

To connect the device, use a flexible adapter cable to protect the USB inter-

face and your USB device against physical damage.

To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system, connect the USB device to port 1.

After the device is connected for the first time, the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of music) and the playlists are transferred from the USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may take some time. The duration depends on the USB device and the number of tracks.

During transfer, you can select the tracks using the directories and file names.

After transfer, you can call up the tracks using the information and playlists.

Information from up to four USB devices can be stored in the vehicle, or a total of about 16,000 tracks.

If a fifth USB device is connected, the information stored in the vehicle on the tracks of the first USB device is deleted.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - USB storage device - 2

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be

played.

Starting audio playback

If the audio device has a device name, the name is displayed.

  1. "CD/Multimedia"

  2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

The name of the audio device may appear.

External devices JUKEBOX Not active

If, for example, an iPhone is connected to the USB interface at the same time that an audio device is connected to the AUX-IN port, the audio signal of the AUX-IN port is played.

Information about the track

If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically:

Artist
Album title
Number of tracks
Track file name

You can call up the tracks using the playlists and information. With USB devices you can also call up tracks using the file directory.

  1. "CD/Multimedia"
  2. "External devices"
  3. Select the symbol.

The name of the audio device may appear.

  1. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Artist".

USB audio: JUKEBOX Browse directory Genre? (All genres) All artists All composers All albums All tracks Start play

All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z search" is available depending on the number of entries.

Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired entry.
Select the desired entry from the list.

  1. Select additional categories if desired.

The tracks found are listed. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

  1. "Start play"

"New search"

Random play sequence

You can play the tracks in the selected list in random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.

Notes

Do not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g. very high temperatures, refer to the operating instructions of the audio device. Otherwise the audio device may become damaged, which could compromise safety while driving.

Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the files may not play back correctly in every case.

Notes on connecting

The USB-audio interface acts as the power supply to the connected audio devices, pro-

vided that this is supported by the audio device. Therefore, do not connect the USB audio device to the power socket in the vehicle during operation.

Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB-audio interface.
Do not connect USB hard disks.
Do not use the USB-audio interface to charge external devices.

TELEPHONE TELEPHONE Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 934 - © 08/08 BMW AG

Communications

This chapter describes how to use the telephone, BMW Assist and TeleService.

Telephone\*

The concept

Your BMW is equipped with a Full preparation package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel or via voice commands.

Once a mobile phone has been paired with your vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. You can store the pairing data for up to four mobile phones simultaneously. If several mobile phones are detected at the same time, the mobile phone last paired can be operated via the vehicle.

Using the telephone inside the vehicle

Using the snap-in adapter\*

The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile phone's battery and connect the mobile phone to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures better network reception and consistent reproduction quality. Please contact your BMW center to find out for which mobile phones there are snap-in adapters available.

For your safety

A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways, and can even save lives in an emergency. While you should consult your mobile phone's separate operating instructions for a detailed description of safety precautions and information, we request that you direct your particular attention to the following:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - For your safety - 1

Only make entries when the traffic situation allows you to do so. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being dis-

tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.

Suitable mobile phones

Please ask your BMW center which mobile phones with Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package and which mobile phones are compatible with the snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular software versions, these mobile phones support the functions described in this Owner's Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones.

Operating options

You can operate the mobile phone* using:

▶ Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10
iDrive, refer to page 16
▶ Voice commands, refer to page 169
Programmable memory keys, refer to page 20

Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, otherwise malfunctions may result.

Start-up

Pairing the mobile phone with the vehicle

The following prerequisites must be met:

Compatible mobile phone: the mobile phone is supported by the Full preparation package mobile phone. You can obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com

The mobile phone is ready to operate.

Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to page 164, and on the mobile phone.

Depending on the mobile phone, some default settings may be necessary for the mobile phone: e.g. using the following menu items:

Bluetooth switched on
▶ Connection must be allowed without requiring further confirmation
Reconnection

Depending on the mobile phone type, the power-saving mode setting, for example, may result in a paired mobile phone not being detected by the vehicle.

For pairing purposes, define any 4 to 16-digit number as a Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number offers the best protection against unauthorized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no longer required after pairing is successful.

The ignition is switched on.

Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle only when the car is stationary, to avoid endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.

Switch on ignition

  1. Insert remote control all the way into the ignition lock.
  2. Switch on ignition without operating the brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop button.

Preparation via iDrive

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Bluetooth"

  3. "Add new phone"

Please use phones recommended by BMW. Add new phone Connected: Handy 1 Paired: Handy 2 Handy 3

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.

Preparation via the mobile phone

  1. Further steps must be carried out with the mobile phone and vary depending on the model. Please refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions, e.g. under the topics of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking or Pairing. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle also appears on the mobile phone display.
  2. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

Pairing

Depending on your mobile phone, you will see messages, first on the mobile phone display or on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the same Bluetooth passkey previously determined by you.

  1. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.

Depending on the mobile phone, you will have approx. 30 seconds to enter your Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and the Control Display.

Enter same passkey for vehicle and bluetooth phone.

If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.

As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle. This data transfer depends on your mobile phone and can take several minutes; please refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions, if necessary.

If not all phone book entries are displayed:

Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary.
Phone book entries with special characters may not be displayed.

Checks to perform if pairing is unsuccessful

Is the mobile phone supported by the mobile phone preparation package? You can obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and vehicle match? The same Bluetooth passkey must be entered on the mobile phone's display and via iDrive.
Did it take you more than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then repeat the pairing procedure.
Only a limited number of devices can be connected with the mobile phone. If necessary, delete connections with other devices.
Is the mobile phone no longer responding? Switch the mobile phone off and on or briefly disconnect the power supply.

Connecting a particular mobile phone

If more than one mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the list is connected. A different mobile phone can be connected by selecting it.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Bluetooth"

  3. Select the desired mobile phone.

Bluetooth Please use phones recommended by BMW. Add new phone Connected: Handy 1 Paired: Handy 2 Handy 3

Unpairing the mobile phone from the vehicle

  1. Switch off the mobile phone.
  2. "Telephone"
  3. "Bluetooth"
  4. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be unpaired.
  5. Open "Options".
  6. "Remove phone from list"

Options ✓ Split screen Switch off display Handy 2 Remove phone from list Telephone ✓ Bluetooth Bluetooth Info

The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list.

The phone book entries and the lists of stored phone numbers are deleted as well.

The use of Bluetooth technology is not permitted in all countries. Observe all applicable local regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone, if necessary.

If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle, and other devices with a Bluetooth interface

can be used in combination with the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop.

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and your mobile phone:

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Bluetooth"
    All paired mobile phones are listed.
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Bluetooth"

Options ✓ Split screen Switch off display Telephone ✓ Bluetooth □ Bluetooth info

Adjusting volume
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth link - 2

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume.

This volume for the hands-free system is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Operation via iDrive

You can operate the following functions using iDrive:

Accepting/rejecting calls
Dialing phone numbers

Selecting phone numbers from the phone book
Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from the list of received calls
Ending a call

When the ignition is switched off or in radio readiness, e.g. after taking the remote control out of the ignition lock, you can continue an ongoing call via the hands-free system for several minutes.

Voice quality

If the person you are talking to is having difficulties understanding you, this may be due to excessive background noise. The Full preparation package mobile phone can compensate for these noises to a certain extent. To optimize voice quality during a call, we recommend that you:

Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing the windows, reducing air flow from the automatic climate control or pointing the open front air vents downward
▶ Reduce the volume of the hands-free system

Requirements

The mobile phone's pairing data are stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone is operational.
The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
The mobile phone is recognized by the vehicle.

Receiving calls

If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone number has been transmitted, the name of the entry is displayed.

Accepting a call

Press the button on the steering wheel.

or

"Accept"

Incoming call 08912345678 Accept Reject

Rejecting a call

"Reject"

The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated.

Ending a call

Press the button on the steering wheel. or

  1. Select the phone number and press the controller.

Active calls ✓ 08912345678 00:10 Hold Keypad dialing Conference call

Dialing phone numbers

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Dial number"
  3. Select the digits individually.
  4. Select this symbol to establish the connection.

08912

or:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are talking to, the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your provider.

Toggling between calls, telephone conference

These functions are available if supported by your mobile phone. Toggling may not be supported by the service provider or may need to be enabled separately.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party

This function may need to be enabled by the service provider and the mobile phone may have to be set up accordingly.

If a second call comes in during an active call, you will hear a call waiting signal.

"Accept"

The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call

Establish another call during an active call.

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Active calls"
  3. "Hold"

Active calls ✓ +498912345678 01:28 Hold Keypad dialing Conference call

The existing call is put on hold.

  1. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

Switching between two calls, toggling

Active call: indicated by a red handset

▶ Call on hold: indicated by a green handset To switch to the call on hold, select this hand- set.

Establishing a conference call

Two calls can be connected to a single telephone conference call.

  1. Establish two calls.
  2. "Conference call"

Active calls ✓ +498912345678 00:29 +498998765421 03:16 (wird gehalten...) Hold Keypad dialing Conference call

When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended.

Phone book

The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call.

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Phone book"

All contacts with a phone number are displayed. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Phone book A-Z search Angi BMW Service Christoph Dr. Tom Mustermann Office

Symbol Storage location*

No symbol In the vehicle.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Phone book - 2

Mobile phone

Calling a contact

  1. Select the desired contact.

A connection is established immediately if calling contacts with one phone number.

For contacts with several phone numbers:

  1. Select the desired phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact

The entries in the contacts can be changed. When a contact from the mobile phone is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

  1. Highlight the contact.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Edit entry"

The contact can be edited.

Redialing

The ten phone numbers dialed last are stored.

Dialing the number via iDrive

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Redial"

Telephone Active calls Phone book ✓ Redial Received calls Dial number Messages Bluetooth

  1. Select the desired entry.
  2. The connection is established.

Deleting entries

  1. Highlight an entry.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts

  1. Highlight an entry.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact"
  4. Complete the entries if necessary.

Received calls

The 20 calls that were last received are displayed.

  1. "Telephone"
  2. "Received calls"

Telephone Active calls Phone book Redial ✓ Received calls Dial number Messages Bluetooth

Dialing a number

Select an entry.

The connection is established.

Deleting entries

  1. Highlight an entry.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts

  1. Highlight an entry.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact"

Switching between mobile phone and hands-free system

From mobile phone to hands-free system\*

You can continue ongoing calls outside of the vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free system as long as the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on your mobile phone, the system automatically switches to hands-free mode.

With mobile phones that do not automatically switch to hands-free mode:

Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, it may be possible to continue the conversation via the hands-free system. Refer to the display on your mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.

From hands-free system to mobile phone

If you are making a call via the hands-free system, it may be possible to continue the call via the mobile phone, depending on your mobile phone model. Refer to the display on your mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.

Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth link.

Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, it may occur that calls are switched from the hands-free system to the mobile phone if reception of the wireless network is poor.

Operation by voice commands\*

The concept

You can operate your mobile phone without having to take a hand off the steering wheel. During your entries, you will be guided in many cases by announcements or questions.

The same prerequisites apply as for operation via iDrive, refer to page 165.

Saying commands

Activating the system

  1. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel. A sound signal indicates that you can say commands.

  2. Say the command.

Example: dialing phone numbers

Start the dialog:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

You say Voice control response
>Dial number<>>Please say the number<<
e.g. >123 456 7890<Depending on your equipment version: >>123 456 7890. Continue?<<
>Dialing<>>Dialing number<<

Adjusting the volume of the instructions

You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system:

Ending/canceling operation by voice commands

Press the button on the steering wheel or

Cancel.

In dialogs where text, e.g. a name, rather than a command is spoken, canceling is only possible using the button on the steering wheel.

Having the possible commands read aloud

The system recognizes specific commands that must be pronounced exactly word for word. You can have the possible commands for any function read aloud to you:

Voice commands<.

Using alternative commands

Often there is more than a single command to run a function, e.g.:

Dial number( or )n. t. a.

Digits from zero to nine are recognized.

You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Using alternative commands - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the button during an instruction.

This volume for the instructions is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Dialing phone numbers - 1

  1. Dial number<.

  2. Say the phone number. For telephone calls abroad, say 'Plus' and then the country code.
  3. Dialing<.

The connection to the desired subscriber is established.

Correcting phone numbers

After the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete this sequence of digits.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Correcting phone numbers - 1

Correct number<.

The digits are deleted.

The command >Correct number can be repeated as often as you like.

Deleting phone numbers

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Deleting phone numbers - 1

Delete<

All digits entered up to this point are deleted.

Voice phone book

A separate voice phone book is needed for operation using voice commands.

The entries must be entered using voice commands and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. In this case, phone numbers stored on the mobile phone cannot be called up or saved there using voice commands. Up to 50 entries can be set up. An entry always consists of a name and a phone number.

Creating and editing a voice phone book\*

To store an entry:

An entry always consists of a name and a phone number.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Creating and editing a voice phone book\* - 1

  1. Save name<.

  2. Say the name. Saying the name for the voice phone book should not take longer than approx. 2 seconds.
  3. Say the phone number after being prompted to do so by the system.
  4. To save the phone number: 'Save'.

To delete an entry:

You can delete any entry from the voice phone book.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Creating and editing a voice phone book\* - 2

  1. }Delete name ^< . The dialog for deleting an entry opens.
  2. Say the name when prompted.
  3. Confirm the query with >Yes<.

To delete all entries:

Delete phone book< deletes all entries in the phone book.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Creating and editing a voice phone book\* - 3

  1. Delete phone book< The dialog for deleting the phone book opens.

  2. Confirm the query with >Yes>.
  3. Confirm the query again with >Yes<.

To read and dial entries:

You can have all entries in your voice phone book read aloud in the order in which they were entered and select a specific entry to establish a connection:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Creating and editing a voice phone book\* - 4

  1. Read phone book< The dialog for reading the phone book opens.

  2. Dial number( , when the desired entry is read aloud.

Selecting an entry

The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Selecting an entry - 1

  1. Choose name<.

The dialog for selecting an entry is opened.

  1. Say the name when prompted.
  2. Confirm the query with >Yes<.

Redialing

To redial the phone number dialed last:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Redialing - 1

Redial<

Notes

Important for voice commands

For voice commands, bear in mind the following:

▶ Pronounce the commands smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.
Keep the doors, windows and glass roof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.
Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter

  1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)
  1. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and press it downward until it engages.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter - 2

natural_image 3D illustration of a black cylindrical object with two labeled arrows pointing to its ends (no text or symbols present)

WBCUSUNN

To remove the snap-in adapter: Press button 1.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter - 3

natural_image 3D diagram of a vehicle or container with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

WORKUPON

Inserting mobile phone

  1. If applicable, remove the protective cap from the mobile phone's antenna connector so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.
  2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the mobile phone up towards the electrical contact points and press it downward until it engages.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Inserting mobile phone - 1

natural_image Illustration of a mobile phone with a screen and keypad, showing a stylized design with arrows (no text or symbols)

www.103.com

The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steering is unlocked.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Inserting mobile phone - 2

To conserve battery power, you should avoid using the mobile phone when the

ignition is switched off.

Removing mobile phone
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Inserting mobile phone - 3

natural_image Close-up of a mobile phone with a button and a downward arrow pointing to the top (no visible text or symbols)

Press the button.

Contacts

You can create and edit contacts. The contacts of the mobile phone* are also displayed. The addresses can be used as destinations for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

New contact

  1. "Contacts"
  2. "New contact"

Contacts ✓ New contact My contacts

  1. If the entry fields are still filled with previous entries, select "Delete input fields".
  2. To fill in the entry fields: Select the symbol next to the entry field.

New contact Delete input fields Store contact in vehicle Last name First name Home Business Mobile

  1. Enter the text.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - New contact - 3

Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the vehicle can be entered. This ensures that destination guidance is possible for all addresses.

  1. "Store contact in vehicle"

Specifying a contact as the home address

A contact that has already been created can be stored as a home address. It is placed at the top of the "My contacts".

  1. "Contacts"
  2. "New contact"
  3. Fill in the entry fields.
    Select the symbol next to the entry field.
  4. Open "Options".
  5. "Store as home address"

Options Split screen Switch off display New Contact Store as home address Contacts Bluetooth Bluetooth Info

If the home address is deleted, only the content of the home address entry is deleted and not the entry itself.

My contacts

Contacts New contact ✓ My contacts

A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the mobile phone*.

Displaying contacts

"My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z

search is offered. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Symbol Storage location\*

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Symbol Storage location\* - 1

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Symbol Storage location\* - 2

Mobile phone

Displaying the detailed view

Select the desired contact.

All fields that have been filled in for that contact are displayed.

Contact Edit contact MUSTERMANN MÜNCHEN, MÜNCHEN (STA PETUELRING 130 DEUTSCHLAND)

Selecting a contact as the navigation destination

  1. "My contacts"
  2. Select the desired contact.
  3. Select the desired address.

Contacts from the mobile phone may contain addresses that do not match the navigation data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot be used for destination guidance. In this case: Manually correct the address.

Checking the address as a destination

An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data contained in the vehicle. An address that is stored on the mobile phone can be matched to the navigation data.

  1. Select the desired contact.
  2. Open "Options".

  3. "Check as destination"

  4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.

After an address has been corrected, the contact can be stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

Dialing phone numbers

  1. "My contacts"
  2. Select the desired contact.
  3. Select the desired phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact

  1. "My contacts"
  2. Select the desired contact.
  3. "Edit contact"

Contact Edit contact MUSTERMANN MÜNCHEN, MÜNCHEN (STA PETUELRING 130 DEUTSCHLAND

  1. Change the entries.
  2. Move the controller to the left.
  3. "Yes"

If a contact from the mobile phone or BMW Search is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is displayed.

Deleting contacts

Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted.

  1. "My contacts"
  2. Highlight the contact.
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"

BMW Assist

Concierge service\*

When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you can obtain information about, for example, restaurants, emergency pharmacy services, gas stations or hotels, as well as receive the corresponding telephone numbers and addresses.

You can then dial a phone number directly or use an address for destination guidance.

Starting the concierge service

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "Concierge"

BMW Assist ✓ Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance BMW Search Internet Customer Relations Service Request

  1. "Start service"

A voice connection is established to the BMW Concierge.

You are connected to an employee of the BMW Concierge to obtain the required information. You can then have the phone number and address sent to you and, for example, use it for destination guidance in the navigation system. Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW Assist Concierge service. When an information message is received, a list of the received messages is displayed automatically.

Messages

The BMW Concierge messages and MyInfo messages from the BMW Assist portal are listed here.

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "Messages"
  3. Select the desired message.

Using an address for destination guidance

"Start guidance" or "Insert as dest. in the trip"

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Using an address for destination guidance - 1

Dialing a phone number

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Dialing a phone number - 1

"Call number in message"

Saving an address

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Store contact in vehicle"

Answering messages

The message answering function is only available for MyInfo messages if answers are predefined in the messages.

  1. Select the message that you wish to respond to.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. Open "Answer".
  4. Select the desired answer.

Deleting messages

  1. Select the message to be deleted.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages".

Roadside Assistance

You can call BMW Roadside Assistance* should you require help in the event of a break-down.

Starting Roadside Assistance

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "TeleService Diagnosis"

BMW Assist Concierge Messages ✓ Roadside Assistance BMW Search Internet Customer Relations Service Request

The Roadside Assistance number is displayed.

  1. Select the number. If a mobile phone * is paired, a connection is established to BMW Roadside Assistance.

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "TeleService Diagnosis"
  3. "Start service"

Roadside Assistance Start service

TeleService Diagnosis\*

TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are transmitted automatically if the vehicle is equipped with BMW TeleService.

TeleService Help\*

TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wireless transmission. TeleService Help can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and termination of the voice connection.

Starting TeleService Help

  1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
  2. Leave the ignition switched on.
  3. Set the parking brake.
  4. "TeleService Help"

After completion of TeleService Help, a voice connection is established to Roadside Assistance.

Activating BMW Assist

If the services included in a valid BMW Assist subscription are not displayed, they may need to be activated.

  1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its current position. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
  2. Switch on the ignition.
  3. "Activate BMW Assist"

Activation may take several minutes. If another menu is opened, activation continues running in the background.

A business search can be opened via BMW Search.

Requirements

Subscription to the optional Convenience Plan.
The vehicle is located within wireless network coverage.
The date setting on the Control Display is current.

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "BMW Search"

BMW Assist Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance ✓ BMW Search Internet Customer Relations Service Request

  1. Select "OK", if necessary.

The BMW Search start page is displayed.

To select and display content:

Turn the controller to highlight an element.
▶ Press the controller to display an element.

Opening the start page

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Home"

Options Split screen Switch off display BMW Online Home Reload Cancel User identification

Loading a new page

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Update"

Canceling

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Cancel loading"

Internet\*

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "Internet"

BMW Assist Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance BMW Search ✓ Internet Customer Relations Service Request

The start page is displayed. The Internet pages may not be displayed in the same way as on a PC screen. Flash and Java applications cannot be displayed.

Using the Internet

A menu bar is displayed for use. To activate the menu bar, move the controller to the left until the cursor is located in the menu bar.

Symbol Function

Activate the mouse cursor
Opening the start page
Refresh
Cancel
Back
I-Enter a URL

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Menu bar - 1

Bookmarks/favorites

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Menu bar - 2

Zoom

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Menu bar - 3

Leave the browser

  1. Select the symbol.
  2. Use the mouse pointer to navigate on the page.

To move the mouse pointer: move the controller in the required direction
To select an element: press the controller
To scroll: turn the controller

Status display

A symbol at the top left of the screen shows the following statuses.

Symbol Function
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Status display - 1

No connection possible

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Status display - 2

Data transfer

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Status display - 3

Secure connection

Entering an Internet address

  1. "Enter URL"
  2. Individually select the letters and characters of the desired address.
  3. Select "OK".

WWW.BMW.DE OK 1/2

Bookmarks/favorites

Adding a bookmark

The page currently being displayed is stored as a bookmark.

  1. Select the symbol.
  2. "Add to bookmarks"

Bookmarks Add to bookmarks www.bmw.com

Selecting a bookmark

  1. Select the symbol.
  2. Select the desired bookmark.

Deleting a bookmark

  1. Select the symbol.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Delete bookmark" or "Delete all bookmarks"

Options Splitscreen Switch off display Internet Delete bookmark Set as home URL Delete all bookmarks Home

Defining a bookmark as the start page

  1. Select the symbol.
  2. Open "Options".
  3. "Set as home URL"

Settings

Suppressing cookies

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Suppress cookies"

Suppressing pop-ups

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Suppress pop-ups"

Suppressing safety warnings

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Block HTTPS pop-ups"

Activating TeleService\*

If the services are not displayed, they may need to be activated.

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "Activate TeleService"

Customer Relations

Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "Customer Relations"
  3. "Start service"

A voice connection is established to Customer Relations.

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "Customer Relations"

The Customer Relations phone number is displayed. If the vehicle is equipped with BMW Assist or the mobile phone preparation package, a voice connection is established.

Customer Relations Please call this number: 08912345678

Service Request\*

You can send a request to your BMW center to arrange a service appointment. The TeleService data is transmitted during a Service Request. Your BMW center will contact you.

Starting a Service Request

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "Service Request"
  3. "Start service"

Service Request Start service Service ready

Automatic Service Request\*

The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW center prior to the service deadline. The center will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged.

You can check when the BMW center was notified.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"

Options Switch off display CD/Multimedia □ Random Music import/export

  1. Open "Options".
  2. "Last Service Request"

BMW center\*

Address and contact data of the BMW center.

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "Your BMW center"

Data transfer\*

The status of the data transfer is displayed.

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "Data transfer"

Service status\*

Display of all services available in the vehicle.

  1. "BMW Assist"
  2. "Service status"
  3. "Available services"

Available services Update BMW Assist Update TeleService Deactivate TeleService

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Service status\* - 2

natural_image Close-up of a glass pipette dispensing liquid into a circular container (no visible text or symbols)

Mobility

This section helps you maintain your car's mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants, wheels and tires, service, maintenance and roadside assistance.

Refueling

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Refueling - 1

Always switch off the engine before refueling, otherwise, fuel cannot be added to link and a message will be displayed.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Refueling - 2

Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel containers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.

Fuel filler door

Opening

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Opening - 1

natural_image Illustration of a car interior with a highlighted vehicle and directional arrow (no text or symbols)
  1. Open fuel filler door. To do so, lightly press the rear edge.
  2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
  3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door.

Closing

Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Closing - 1

Do not pinch the band attached to the cap, otherwise the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or missing.

Manually releasing the fuel filler door

In the event of a malfunction, you can release the fuel filler door manually:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Manually releasing the fuel filler door - 1

natural_image Interior view of a computer case with a close-up inset showing a pointing tool (no text or symbols visible)
  1. Remove the cover from the right-hand sidewall of the cargo bay.
  2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol. The fuel filler door is released.

Observe the following when refueling

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Observe the following when refueling - 1

When handling fuels, follow the safety instructions provided at filling stations, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead to

premature pump shutoff
reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity

Approx. 16.6 US gal/63 liters, including the reserve capacity of 3.3 US gal/12.5 liters.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Fuel tank capacity - 1

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.

Fuel specifications

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Fuel specifications - 1

Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this would cause permanent damage to the catalytic converter.

Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing 85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 93

Always use this premium grade fuel to obtain maximum fuel economy and performance.

The minimum approved fuel grade is AKI 91.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 93 - 1

Do not use any gasoline below the specified minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the e could be damaged.

Use high-quality brands

Field experience has indicated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10% ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Use high-quality brands - 1

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in driveability, starting and stalling problems especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude.

Should you encounter driveability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressures

Information for your safety

It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure.

Checking pressure

Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. Do not drive on a flat tire. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 78, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 79.

Inflation pressure specifications

The table below provides all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recommended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW center.

For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressures, observe the following:

▶ Tire sizes for your vehicle

Load conditions
▶ Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h

For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following page in the columns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.

These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's-side door post when the driver's door is open.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car's front wheel and side door panel (no visible text or symbols)

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or 160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following page in the columns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits, otherwise violations of the laws could occur.

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/hTraveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperatureBMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h - 1BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h - 2BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h - 3
235/40 R 18 M+S33/23039/27033/23036/25038/260
Front: 245/40 ZR 18 33/230 - 35/240 - 38/260 - Rear: 265/40 ZR 18 - 35/240 - 35/240 - 41/280
Front: 245/35 ZR 19 35/240 - 35/240 - 41/280 - Rear: 265/35 ZR 19 - 36/250 - 35/240 - 44/300
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 220.

Tire identification marks

Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

e.g. 245/35 ZR 19 235/40 R 18 100 V Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in % Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating, not on ZR tires Speed code letter, in front of the R on ZR tires

Speed code letter

$$ \begin{array}{l} Q = \text { up to } 1 0 0 \mathrm{mph} / 1 6 0 \mathrm{km} / \mathrm{h} \ T = \text { up to } 1 1 8 \mathrm{mph} / 1 9 0 \mathrm{km} / \mathrm{h} \ H = \text { up to } 1 3 1 \mathrm{mph} / 2 1 0 \mathrm{km} / \mathrm{h} \ V = \text { up to } 1 5 0 \mathrm{mph} / 2 4 0 \mathrm{km} / \mathrm{h} \ W = \text { up to } 1 6 7 \mathrm{mph} / 2 7 0 \mathrm{km} / \mathrm{h} \ Y = \text { up to } 1 8 6 \mathrm{mph} / 3 0 0 \mathrm{km} / \mathrm{h} \ Z = \text { over } 1 5 0 \mathrm{mph} / 2 4 0 \mathrm{km} / \mathrm{h} \ \end{array} $$

Tire Identification Number

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

e.g. DOT xxxx xxx 3208 Manufacturer's code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age

Tire age

The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 3208 means that the tire was manufactured in week 32 of 2008. BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Tread wear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Temperature - 1

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires.

These have better winter properties than summer tires.

XL

Designation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire condition

Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth

The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface. When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Minimum tread depth - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car tire tread pattern with a magnified inset showing the edge detail (no text or symbols visible)

Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.

Wheel/tire damage

Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more susceptible to road hazard and consequential damages.

Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Wheel/tire damage - 1

In these cases, reduce speed immediately and have wheels and tires thor-

oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there.

Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard to vehicle occupants and other road users.

New wheels and tires

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - New wheels and tires - 1

Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW center or tire shop that

works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this

work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.

Retreaded tires

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Retreaded tires - 1

BMW recommends that you do not use retreaded tires, since driving safety may be impaired. The causes for this include potentially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.

Correct wheels and tires

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Correct wheels and tires - 1

BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufacturing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions, which could lead to body contact and thus to severe accidents. When selecting tires, also take their load capacity into account. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their driving safety.

You can inquire about the right wheel/tire combination at your BMW center.

The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS or DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire combination again as soon as possible.

Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronics

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a puncture, refer to page 79. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Recommended tire brands - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car tire with star-shaped markings and a diagonal line, no visible text or symbols

Certain makes of tire are recommended by BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tire.

When properly used, these tires meet the highest standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.

Special characteristics of winter tires

BMW recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45°F/+7°C.

Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.

Pay attention to speed

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Pay attention to speed - 1

Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure to do so could result in tire damage and accidents.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.

Swapping wheels between axles

BMW advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles, even if all tires have the same size, as this could impair driving characteristics. With standard-equipment tires

and other mixed tire sizes, swapping wheels between the axles is not permissible.

Snow chains\*

Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your BMW center for more information.

Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h.

Ensure that the snow chains are sufficiently tensioned at all times. If necessary, retention as specified by the snow chain manufacturer.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Snow chains\* - 1

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted, otherwise the

instrument might issue an incorrect reading.

Under the hood

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Under the hood - 1

Do not work on the car unless you possess the necessary technical knowledge. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guidelines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a BMW center or by a workshop that work according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Hood

Releasing
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Hood - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

Opening
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Hood - 2

natural_image Front view of a car with a logo and a small inset image showing a person using a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Hood - 3

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield before you open the engine compartment. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down, otherwise injuries may result.

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Hood - 4

natural_image Front view of a car with a grille and a downward arrow indicating a structural detail (no text or symbols present)

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 10 in/25 cm. It must be clearly heard to engage.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Hood - 5

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear, otherwise injuries may result.

If you see any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely closed, stop at once and close it securely.

Important parts of the engine compartment

Diagram of a car engine compartment with numbered parts for identification

1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 196
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp cleaning system and window washer system, refer to page 60

Engine oil

The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.

Checking oil level

Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level monitor.

The oil level can be displayed when the engine is warm. Continuous short distance travel or a very sporty driving style may make measurement impossible.

3 Jump-starting connection, refer to page 211
4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil

Display in the instrument cluster

+74 11:15am Oil OK 000016 001.5

1 Oil level
2 Maximum mark
3 Minimum mark
4 Computer button

Press button 4 in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until the oil level display appears in the instrument cluster.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Display in the instrument cluster - 2

M dual clutch transmission*: the oil level appears in the top display.

The oil level must be between the two markings.

A new measurement is taken automatically each time the engine is started.

Possible displays

Oil OK 000016 001.5 1 Oil 000016 001.5 2 Oil +11 000016 001.5 3 Oil >MAX 000016 001.5 4 Oil 000016 001.5 5

1 Oil level OK.

2 Oil level is being checked.

This can take about 1 minute if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the car is moving. If engine oil was added, it can take up to 30 minutes to get an oil level reading.

3 Oil level down to minimum:

Add engine oil at the next opportunity, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil on page 195. Add at least 0.5 US quart/0.5 liters, otherwise the oil-level monitor will be unable to display the new value reliably.

If the oil level is below the minimum value,

add engine oil immediately to avoid engine damage.

4 Oil level is too high.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Possible displays - 2

Have the vehicle checked immediately, otherwise the excess oil may to engine damage.

5 A value cannot be read at this time. The engine is not yet warm.

Quick measurement

In addition to the automatic measurement, you can also determine the current oil level manually, e.g. after adding engine oil, but such measurements are less accurate.

  1. Park the vehicle with a warm engine, i.e. after an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km, on a horizontal surface.
  2. Let the engine idle.
  3. Press the computer button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until the oil level display appears in the instrument cluster.
  4. Press the computer button for at least 2 seconds. The oil level is determined. A clock symbol appears during measurement.
  5. After approx. 1 minute, the current oil level is displayed.

Display via iDrive

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"

Vehicle Info Onboard info ✓ Trip computer Vehicle status

3. "Engine oil level"

Vehicle status Engine oil level

Possible messages

"Engine oil level OK"
"Measurement not possible at this time."
"Measuring engine oil level...": This can take about 1 minute if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the car is moving. If engine oil was added, it can take up to 30 minutes to get an oil level reading.

"Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 quart!"

Add engine oil at the next opportunity, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil on page 195. Add at least 0.5 US quart/0.5 liters, otherwise the oil-level monitor will be unable to display the new value reliably. If the oil level is below the minimum value, add engine oil immediately to avoid engine damage.

"Engine oil level too high! Have this checked."

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Possible messages - 1

Have the vehicle checked immediately, otherwise the excess oil may

lead to engine damage.

"Measurement inactive. Have this checked."

Do not add engine oil. Before resuming your trip, note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 66. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Adding engine oil - 1

natural_image Close-up of a mechanical component with a close-up inset showing a circular feature (no visible text or symbols)

Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a corresponding message is shown on the Control Display.

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km, otherwise the engine could be damaged. Add no more than 1 US quart/1 liter of oil, otherwise too much engine oil can lead to engine damage. Add at least 0.5 US quart/0.5 liters, otherwise the oil-level monitor will be unable to display the new value reliably.

Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the relevant warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.

Oil change

Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Specified engine oils

The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine. BMW continuously approves specific oils after confirming their suitability for use in its vehicles with extensive testing.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Specified engine oils - 1

Do not use oil additives as these may cause engine damage.

Your BMW center will be glad to answer any questions regarding BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils.

You can also call BMW of North America at 1-800-831-1117 or visit the website www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Viscosity ratings

Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and is categorized in SAE classes.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Viscosity ratings - 1

Approved oils belong to the 10W-60 SAE class.

Alternative oil types

If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not available, you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use oils with the following specifications:

Viscosity:

preferred: SAE 10W-60;

alternative: SAE 10W-40, SAE 5W-50 or SAE 10W-50

Specification:

API SJ/CF, API SK/CF or higher

Low ambient temperatures

The oils used at BMW factories for your vehicle type are suitable for virtually any ambient temperature. However, if the vehicle is operated at temperatures below -4^ / -20^ for extended periods, your BMW center will be glad to recommend an optimal oil.

BMW recommends

Castrol

Coolant

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Coolant - 1

Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant

can cause burns.

Coolant consists of half water and half additive. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for suitable additives.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Coolant - 2

Only use suitable additives, otherwise engine damage may result. Because

additives are harmful to your health, it is important to follow the instructions on the containers.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Coolant - 3

Comply with the appropriate environmental protection regulations when dis-

posing of coolant additives.

Checking coolant level

  1. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down.
  2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.
  3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to the filler neck.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Checking coolant level - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle engine bay with a mechanical component and a close-up inset showing a valve assembly (no visible text or symbols)
  1. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
  2. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
  3. If the loss of coolant is substantial, have the cause eliminated as soon as possible.

Maintenance

BMW Maintenance System

Vehicle status Service required

The BMW Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The objective is to optimize efforts with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance costs.

If and when you come to sell your BMW, a comprehensive record of servicing will prove a significant benefit.

Condition Based Service CBS

Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected maintenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, refer to page 66:

Engine oil
▶ Brake pads: separately for front and rear
Brake fluid
▶ Vehicle check
Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations

Service data in the remote control

Your vehicle continuously stores service-requirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advisor can read out this data from the remote control unit, and propose an optimized maintenance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore hand your BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit that you last used.

Make sure that the date is always set correctly, refer to page 69; otherwise the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.

BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your BMW center.

Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.

Socket for On-Board Diagnosis OBD

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Socket for On-Board Diagnosis OBD - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Primary components that make up exhaust emissions can be checked by a device via the OBD socket.

This socket is located on the driver's side to the left, on the bottom of the instrument panel underneath a cover.

Exhaust emission values

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Exhaust emission values - 1

The warning lamp lights up:

The exhaust emission values have worsened. Have the car checked as

soon as possible.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Exhaust emission values - 2

Canadian models display this warning lamp.

The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If this happens, you should reduce your speed and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions-related components, especially the catalytic converter.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Exhaust emission values - 3

The warning lamp comes on if the gas cap is not properly tightened and the OBD system assumes that fuel vapor

is escaping. If the gas cap is then tightened, the warning lamp should go out within a few days.

Event data recorders

Your vehicle may be equipped with one or several measuring or diagnostic modules or a device for recording or sending certain vehicle data or information. In addition, if you have signed a service contract for BMW Assist, cer-

tain vehicle data may be transmitted or recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding services.

Care

Care products

Regular cleaning and care contributes significantly to the value retention of your BMW.

BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your vehicle with products that are approved by BMW for this purpose.

Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on the products and services available for cleaning and caring for your BMW.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Care products - 1

Original BMW CareProducts have been material tested, laboratory checked and in the field, and offer optimal care and action for your vehicle.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Care products - 2

Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol or solvents as these may result in dam-

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Care products - 3

Cleaning agents can contain substances that are dangerous or hazardous to your

health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety instructions on the packaging. When cleaning inside the vehicle, always open the doors or windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, provide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products designed for cleaning vehicles.

Exterior care

Washing the vehicle

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Washing the vehicle - 1

Especially during the winter months, ensure that the vehicle is washed more

frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead to vehicle damage.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Washing the vehicle - 2

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them, otherwise

water can reduce braking efficiency over the short term and the brake discs can corrode.

Automatic car washes

Preference should be given to cloth car washes.

Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is suitable for your BMW. Check the following:

Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to page 219
If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, refer to page 42
▶ Maximum permissible tire width

Preparations before driving into an automatic car wash:

Deactivate the rain sensor* to prevent unintentional wiping.
Remove additional attachments, e.g. spoiler or telephone antennas, if there is a possibility that they could be damaged.

M dual clutch transmission

Before driving into an automatic car wash, perform the following steps to ensure that the vehicle can roll:

  1. Insert the remote control, even with convenient access, into the ignition lock.
  2. Engage transmission position N.
  3. Release the parking brake.
  4. Switch off the engine.
  5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Steam jets / high-pressure washers

When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, ensure that you maintain sufficient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed a temperature of 140^ F/60°C.

Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or temperature can lead to component damage or water penetration. Follow the operating instructions of the high-pressure washer.

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray against the sensors and cameras, e.g. Park Distance Control, for an extended period and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Manual car wash

When washing the vehicle by hand, use large quantities of water and car shampoo if necessary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or washing brush, applying light pressure only.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Manual car wash - 1

Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the rain sensor or switch off the ignition to prevent unintentional activation of the wipers.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Manual car wash - 2

Observe local regulations pertaining to washing vehicles by hand.

Headlamps

Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents.

Remove contamination, such as insects, by soaking with shampoo or insect remover and then rinsing with plenty of water.

Thaw ice with a windshield de-icer and do not use an ice scraper.

Windows

Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Windows - 1

Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners containing quartz.

Wiper blades

Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to avoid streaking.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Wiper blades - 1

Wax and preservative residue and contamination on the window can lead to streaking when operating the windshield wipers, leading to premature wear of the wiper blades and causing the rain sensor to malfunction.

Paintwork care

Regular care contributes to value retention and protects the paintwork against the long-term effects of damaging substances.

Region-specific environmental influences can damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is important to adapt the frequency and scope of car care accordingly.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Paintwork care - 1

Immediately remove very aggressive substances, e.g. spilled fuel, oil, grease, tree resin or bird droppings, to prevent damage to the paintwork.

Repairing paintwork damage

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Repairing paintwork damage - 1

Immediately repair scratches or similar damage, such as that caused by stones hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent rusting.

BMW recommends having paintwork damage repaired by a professional paint repair workshop according to BMW specifications using original BMW paint materials.

Preservation

A preservation treatment is necessary when water no longer beads off of the clean paintwork surface. Only use products for paintwork preservation that contain carnauba or synthetic waxes.

Rubber seals

Treat only with water or rubber care products.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Rubber seals - 1

Do not use silicon-containing care products on rubber seals, otherwise noise and ge could occur.

Chrome parts

Carefully clean vehicle parts, such as the radiator grill, door handles or window frames, with copious quantities of water and a shampoo additive. For additional treatment, use a chrome polish.

Light-alloy wheels

For technical reasons, dust is generated during braking that is deposited on the light-alloy wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid-free rim cleaner.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Light-alloy wheels - 1

Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly alkaline and abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets over 140 °F/60 °C, otherwise damage may occur.

Outside sensors / cameras

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Outside sensors / cameras - 1

Keep the sensors and cameras on the outside of the vehicle, e.g. Park Distance

Control, clean and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully functional.

Interior care

Upholstery / cloth trim

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to remove superficial dirt.

To treat severe stains, e.g. from beverages, use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in combination with suitable interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the packaging.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Upholstery / cloth trim - 1

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong

rubbing.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Upholstery / cloth trim - 2

Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the

seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are closed.

Leather / leather trim

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Leather / leather trim - 1

The leather used by BMW is a high quality natural product. Slight irregularities in the

leather are a typical characteristic of natural leather.

Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the leather have an abrasive effect, leading to increased wear and causing the leather surface to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, frequently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

In particular, ensure that light-colored leather is cleaned regularly as it has a tendency to soil more easily.

Treat the leather twice a year using a leather lotion as dirt and grease will gradually attack the leather's protective layer.

Carpets / cargo bay

You can vacuum the carpets and floor mats or clean them with interior cleaner if heavily soiled. The floor mats can be removed for cleaning. When replacing the mats, ensure that the seat rails do not extend over the floor mats, as this may damage the mats.

Lint on the floor mats occurs for technical reasons and can be removed by vacuuming repeatedly.

Interior plastic parts

▶ Imitation leather surfaces
Lamp glasses
▶ Display pane of instrument cluster
▷ Matt parts

Clean with water and, if necessary, with solvent-free plastic cleaner.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.

Safety belts

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Safety belts - 1

Do not clean with cleaning agents as these may destroy the fabric.

Interior sensors / cameras

To clean interior sensors and cameras, use a lint-free cloth moistened with glass cleaner.

Displays

To clean the displays, e.g. of the radio or instrument cluster, use a display cleaning cloth or a soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Displays - 1

Avoid applying excessive pressure when cleaning the displays, otherwise damage occur.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Displays - 2

Do not use chemical or abrasive household cleaning agents. Keep all types of

fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces or electrical components may be corroded or damaged.

CD/DVD drives

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - CD/DVD drives - 1

Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may damage parts of the drive.

Vehicle storage

If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for longer than six weeks, your BMW center or a workshop that operates according to BMW specifications will be glad to advise you.

Replacing components

Onboard tool kit

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Onboard tool kit - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a medical device with internal components (no text or symbols)

The onboard tool kit is stored in a compartment on the right-hand side of the cargo bay. Remove the cover.

Wiper blades

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Wiper blades - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car's side panel with a close-up inset showing a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)
  1. Fold up the wiper arm.
  2. Remove the cover. To do so, press the hook on the bottom, see arrow.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Wiper blades - 2

natural_image Diagram of a car's side profile with a curved arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)
  1. Fold the wiper blade upwards.
  2. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the windshield, see arrow.

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield before you open the engine compartment.

Lamps and bulbs

Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recommends having your BMW center perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your BMW center.

Only change bulbs while they are cool to the touch, otherwise you could suffer burns.

When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the consumer in question, otherwise short-circuits could result. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

For care of the headlamps, please follow the instructions in the chapter entitled 'Care'.

If the routine for changing a particular bulb is not described here, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Light-emitting diodes LED

Control elements, display components, part of the exterior lighting and other interior equipment in your vehicle are equipped with covered

light-emitting diodes as light sources. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Light-emitting diodes LED - 1

Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source for several hours, otherwise this could cause irritation to the retina.

Xenon lamps

These bulbs have a very long service life and are highly unlikely to fail.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Xenon lamps - 1

Have any work on the xenon lamp system, including bulb replacements, performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if such work is carried out improperly, the high voltage in the system presents the danger of fatal injuries.

Accessing the bulbs

  1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.
  2. Remove the upper cover from the head-lamp. To do so, use a screwdriver to press the catches towards the rear, see arrows, and pull the cover forward and out.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Accessing the bulbs - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car interior showing a black plastic seat and a magnified inset of the seat area (no text or symbols visible)

Follow the same steps in reverse order to reattach the cover.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Accessing the bulbs - 2

Be careful when installing the cover, otherwise leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp system.

Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps, daytime running lamps

H8 bulb, 35 watts

  1. Remove the cover, refer to Accessing the bulbs.
  2. Turn the bulb approx. 90^ , see arrow, and take it out.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps, daytime running lamps - 1

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle showing a person inside a car with an arrow pointing to the side (no visible text or symbols)
  1. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and reconnect the plug.
  2. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
  3. Reattach the cover.

Corner-illuminating lamp\*

H3 bulb, 55 watts

  1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.
  2. Remove the cover, refer to Accessing the bulbs.
  3. Push the wire bracket out of the anchor towards the right and fold it up.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Corner-illuminating lamp\* - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car interior with visible structural elements and a magnified inset showing a cable or cable attachment (no text or symbols)
  1. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and reconnect the plug.
  2. Insert the bulb.
  3. Fold the wire bracket down and engage it.
  4. Reattach the cover.

Turn signals, front

PY24W Silver Vision bulb, 24 watts

The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover in the wheel arch.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Turn signals, front - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car interior with directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)
  1. Turn the respective wheel inwards.
  2. Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the cover.
  3. Turn the bulb holder to the left, arrow 2, and take it out.
  4. Turn the bulb socket in the bulb holder to the right for removal and replacement.
  5. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning it to the right.
  6. Attach the cover by positioning the bottom edge first and then turning both locks all the way to the right using a coin.

Tail lamps

Brake lamp in the luggage compartment lid: H21W bulb, 21 watts
Backup lamp: W16W bulb, 16 watts
Other bulbs: P21W bulb, 21 watts

The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part is in the luggage compartment lid, the other is in the fender.

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Brake lamp
2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp, LED
3 Turn signal, LED
4 Backup lamp
5 Tail lamp, LED
6 Brake lamp

If one of the bulbs 2, 3 or 5 malfunctions, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Fender-mounted lamps

  1. Using a screwdriver, pry off the cover in the cargo bay or release the turn-lock fastener by turning it counterclockwise and remove the cover.
  2. Loosen the bulb holder at the clip, see arrow, and pull out.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Fender-mounted lamps - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a device being inserted into a container, with an inset close-up of the internal component (no text or symbols visible)
  1. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
  2. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.
  3. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.

Lamps in the luggage compartment lid

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Lamps in the luggage compartment lid - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car rear door with an inset showing a close-up of the interior component (no text or symbols visible)
  1. Take the warning triangle out of its holder, refer to page 21 1. Unscrew the holder using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit.
  2. Pry out the fastening plugs in the trim of the luggage compartment lid using a screw-driver and remove the trim.
  3. Unfasten the bulb holder at the clip, see arrow, and remove.
  4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
  5. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.
  6. Reattach the trim of the luggage compartment lid and the holder for the warning triangle.

License plate lamp, center brake lamp, parking/tail lamp and turn signal\*

These lamps use LED technology for operation. In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Repairing a flat tire with the M Mobility System

To repair a flat tire, your BMW M3 includes an M Mobility System. With this system you can apply a sealant to the inside of the tire to seal the damaged section, restore the tire inflation pressure and continue on your trip.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Repairing a flat tire with the M Mobility System - 1

Safety measures in the event of a flat tire: Park the vehicle as far away from moving traffic as possible and on a firm surface. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.

Apply the parking brake and engage first gear or reverse. Have all occupants leave the vehicle and move beyond the danger zone, e.g. behind the guard rails.

If necessary, erect a warning triangle* or warning flasher* at a suitable distance. Adhere to country-specific regulations.

Preparations

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Preparations - 1

natural_image Top-down view of a car's front compartment showing the hood and internal compartments (no text or symbols visible)

The M Mobility System is located in the cargo bay under the floor board.

If possible, leave any foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire in place.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Preparations - 2

Instructions on how to use the M Mobility System can also be found on the device

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Preparations - 3

Before using the M Mobility System, follow the instructions on the sealant bot-

Remove the label with the speed restriction from the sealant bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Preparations - 4

Please note the expiry date on the sealant bottle.

Components of the M Mobility System

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Components of the M Mobility System - 1

natural_image Illustration of a cylindrical mechanical device with two labeled parts (1 and 2), connected by a coiled cable (no text or symbols beyond labels)

1 Sealant bottle and label with speed restriction
2 Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel

Labeled diagram of a portable electronic device with numbered components

3 Connector and cable for the cigarette lighter socket/power socket
4 Holder for the sealant bottle
5 Compressor
6 On/off switch
7 Pressure gauge for displaying the tire inflation pressure
8 Screw on pressure gauge to reduce tire inflation pressure
9 Hose to connect compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and wheel

The connector, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

Using the M Mobility System

To repair a flat tire with the M Mobility System, proceed as follows:

▶ Fill the sealant, refer to page 207.
▶ Distribute the sealant, refer to page 207.
Produce the tire inflation pressure, refer to page 208.

Filling the sealant

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Filling the sealant - 1

Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.

  1. Shake the sealant bottle.
  2. Screw connection hose 9 onto the connector of the sealant bottle.
  3. Ensure that screw 8 on the pressure gauge is closed.
  4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw filling hose 2 of the sealant bottle onto the valve.
  5. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing of the compressor so that the bottle is upright.

Diagram of automotive electrical components with numbered parts, including a cylindrical device, cable, and electronic device.

  1. Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position 0.
  2. Insert connector 3 into the cigarette lighter socket/power socket in the interior of the vehicle, refer to page 100.
  3. With the ignition switched on: Switch on the compressor and let it run for approx. 3 minutes to fill the sealant. The inflation pressure of the tire after filling is unimportant.
  4. Switch off the compressor.
  5. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle connector and from the tire valve. Return the M Mobility System to its storage location in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approx. 2 miles/3 km to evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h. If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph/20 km/h.

Producing the tire inflation pressure

  1. After driving approx. 2 miles/3 km, stop at a suitable location.

  2. Connect connection hose 9 of the compressor directly to the tire valve.

  3. Insert connector 3 into the cigarette lighter socket/power socket in the interior of the vehicle.

  4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to 29 psi/200 kPa. With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows:

To increase the inflation pressure: Switch on the compressor, position I. To check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.

Do not let the compressor run for more than 10 minutes, otherwise the device will overheat and may be damaged.

To reduce the inflation pressure: turn screw 8 on the pressure gauge.

If the inflation pressure is not maintained, drive the vehicle a second time, refer to Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4.

Use of the M Mobility System may be ineffectual for tire damage larger than approx. 0.16 in/4 mm. Please contact the nearest BMW center, refer to page 210, or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the M Mobility System.

The tire inflation pressure must be at least 29 psi/200 kPa. If it is not, do not continue driving.

Continuing your trip

Do not exceed the maximum allowable speed of 50 mph/80 km/h to avoid the risk of an accident.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 78 for more information.

Have the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of the M Mobility System replaced as soon as possible.

Changing wheels

The tools for changing wheels are available as optional accessories from your BMW center.

Jack mounting points

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Jack mounting points - 1

natural_image Side view of a car with two upward arrows indicating motion or alignment (no text or symbols present)

The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.

Vehicle battery

Battery care

The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.

Charging the battery

Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on page 211.

Disposal

Have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or hand them in to a recycling center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always

secure the battery against tipping over during transport.

Power failure

After a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be programmed:

Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to page 68.
Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, refer to page 139.
▶ Navigation system
Operability must be waited for, refer to page 116.
Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be raised. The system must be initialized. Please contact your BMW center.
▶ Seat and mirror memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to page 40.
Inside rearview mirror with digital compass The system must be calibrated, refer to page 96.

Fuses

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Fuses - 1

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating, otherwise this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Fuses - 2

natural_image Front view of a car's front panel with two white arrows pointing to the side (no text or symbols visible)

Open the cover in the glove compartment and remove it.

Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set in holders on the distributor box.

See the rear of the cover for information on fuse assignment.

Giving and receiving assistance

Emergency Request\*

Conditions for an Emergency Request:

▶ Equipment version with Full preparation package mobile phone. This equipment makes it possible to send an Emergency Request even if no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle.
BMW Assist is activated. Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 176.
Radio readiness is on.
The BMW Assist system is logged on to a wireless network.
The Emergency Request system is operable.

Once your service contract for BMW Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW center without you having to visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, Emergency Requests are not possible. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.

Sending an Emergency Request

  1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Sending an Emergency Request - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car interior with a sensor and SOS logo (no readable text or symbols)
  1. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up.

As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established, the LED flashes.

Once the BMW Assist Response Center has received your Emergency Request, the

BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center will be able to initiate further steps to assist you under certain conditions.

If the circumstances allow this, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established. You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation.

Data for determining the necessary rescue measures are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. the current position of your vehicle, if it can be determined.

If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may still be heard by the BMW Assist Response Center, however.

Under certain conditions, an Emergency Request is sent automatically immediately after a severe accident. This Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by the button being pressed.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Sending an Emergency Request - 2

For technical reasons, the Emergency Request service cannot be guaranteed

for the most unfavorable conditions.

Roadside Assistance

The BMW Roadside Assistance is there to assist you around the clock in the event of a breakdown, including on weekends and public holidays.

The phone numbers of the Roadside Assistance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure.

In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist, you can establish contact with BMW Roadside Assistance for breakdown assistance directly via iDrive, refer to page 175.

First aid pouch\*

Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items in good time, if necessary.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - First aid pouch\* - 1

natural_image Illustration of a battery inside a device casing (no text or symbols visible)

The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the cargo bay in a storage area.

Warning triangle\*

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Warning triangle\* - 1

natural_image Top-down view of a white rectangular device with two black buttons inserted into the back panel (no text or symbols visible)

The warning triangle is located in a holder in the luggage compartment lid. Press the tabs to take it out.

Jump starting

If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Jump starting - 1

Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-may occur. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.

Preparation

  1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the battery.
  2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
  3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
    There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise is a danger of shorting.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Preparation - 1

Connecting jumper cables

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Connecting jumper cables - 1

Connect the jumper cables in the correct order, so that no sparks which could be injury occur.

Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in the engine compartment which acts as the battery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine compartment overview on page 193. The cap is marked with +.

  1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting connection up to remove.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Connecting jumper cables - 2

natural_image Interior view of a vehicle showing engine, battery, and dashboard components (no visible text or symbols)
  1. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
  2. Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

  3. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/- jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle.

Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Connecting jumper cables - 3

natural_image Interior view of a car showing engine compartment with a white arrow pointing to a component (no visible text or symbols)
  1. Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/- jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

  1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.
  2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way.

If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

  1. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
  2. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.

If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Starting the engine - 1

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

Tow-starting, towing away

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Tow-starting, towing away - 1

Observe the applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing vehi-

cles.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Tow-starting, towing away - 2

Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being

Using a tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

It is stored in the onboard tool kit underneath the cover on the right-hand side of the cargo bay, refer to page 203.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Using a tow fitting - 1

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the

tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.

Access to screw thread

Release the cover panel in the bumper: Press on the upper part of the cover panel.

Front
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Access to screw thread - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car's front bumper area with a white arrow pointing to the nose (no text or symbols visible)

Rear
BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Access to screw thread - 2

natural_image Side view of a white car rear bumper with a black dot and arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

Being towed

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Being towed - 1

Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 49, otherwise the low-beam

headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and windshield wipers may be unavailable.

Power steering assistance is not available when the engine is not running. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort.

Manual transmission

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic - 1

Ensure that the parking lock P is not engaged as the rear wheels will otherwise locked.

When using the car wash function, refer to page 51, note that the parking lock P is engaged automatically after approx. 30 minutes, blocking the rear wheels.

If an electrical malfunction occurs or if towing takes longer than approx. 20 minutes, manually release the parking lock, refer to page 54.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic - 2

When towing, do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph/50 km/h and a maxi-

mum distance of 30 miles/50 km, otherwise the transmission can be damaged.

BMW recommends transporting the vehicle on a tow truck with a flat bed.

Towing methods

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - Towing methods - 1

Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts, otherwise damhay result.

With a tow bar

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - With a tow bar - 1

The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may

be impossible to maintain control.

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:

Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.

The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - With a tow bar - 2

Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle result in damage.

With a tow rope

When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - With a tow rope - 1

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.

With a tow truck

Manual transmission:

Diagram showing three types of car loading modes: a flatbed truck, a sedan with no load, and a flatbed truck with a flatbed trailer.

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle raised as this may cause the steering to turn.

M dual clutch transmission:

BMW M3 Sedan (2009) - With a tow truck - 2

natural_image Three line-drawn truck illustrations with no visible text, numbers, or symbols

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Tow-starting

If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but jump-start the engine, refer to page 211. Vehi-

cles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold.

Manual transmission

  1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.
  2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 49.
  3. Shift into 3rd gear.
  4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch depressed and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch completely again.
  5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
  6. Have the vehicle checked.

M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic

Vehicles with an M dual clutch transmission cannot be tow-started. Jump-starting, refer to page 211.

TOMBERY HAGLICK Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 934 - © 08/08 BMW AG

Reference

This chapter contains technical data, short commands for the voice activation system and an index that will help you find information most quickly.

Technical data

Engine data

M3
Displacement cu in/cm ^3 244/3,999
Number of cylinders 8
Maximum power output hp 414at engine speed rpm 8,300
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 295/400at engine speed rpm 3,900

Dimensions
57.0/1,447 60.6/1,540 78.9/2,005 60.6/1,539 71.5/1,817 108.7/2,761 180.4/4,583

All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 38 ft 5 in/11.7 m.

Weights

M3
Approved gross weight lbs/kg 4,740/2,150
Load lbs/kg 1,014/460
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,249/1,020
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,624/1,190
Approved roof load capacityIbs/kg
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/liters 15.9/450

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

Capacities

Notes
Fuel tankUS gal/litersapprox. 16.6/63Fuel grade: page 185
including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 3.3/12.5
Window washer system For more details: page 60
including headlamp washersUS qt/litersapprox. 4.8/4.5

Short commands for the voice activation system\*

With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu

item is selected. Here are the important short commands for the voice activation system.

Useful short commands

Function Command
Switching on the radio>Radio on<
Opening the music collection>Music collection<
Tone control >Tone<
Opening the settings >Settings<
Opening the computer>Onboard info<
Opening the contacts* >Contacts<
Displaying the phone book* >Phonebook<
Opening BMW Assist*>B M W Assist<
Opening the home address*>Home address<
Opening destination entry*>Enter address<
Opening destination guidance*>Guidance<

CD/Multimedia

CD/DVD drive

Function Command
Playing back a CD>C D on<
Selecting a CD>Select C D<
Selecting a CD and track>C D ... track ...< e.g. CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track>C D track ...< e.g. track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu>C D and multimedia<
CD and DVD>C D and D V D<
CD and DVD changer* >C D and D V D<
CD and DVD menu>C D and D V D<
Playing back a DVD>D V D on<

Function Command

Selecting a DVD>D V D ...<
Switching on the DVD changer>D V D on<
Entertainment details on the split screen>Entertainment details<

Music collection

Function Command
Calling up the current playback>Current playback<
Opening the music collection>Music collection<
Playing back the music collection>Music collection on<
Searching for music; opening the menu>Music search<
Playing back the most frequently played tracks>Top fifty<

External devices

Function Command
Opening external devices>External devices<

Tone control

Function Command
Opening the tone control >Tone<

Radio

FM

Function Command
Calling up the radio >Radio<
Switching on the radio>Radio on<
Calling up FM >F M<
Playing FM>F M on<
Opening manual search>Manual search<
Calling up a frequency>Frequency ... megahertz< e.g. 93.5 mega-hertz or frequency 93.5
Selecting the frequency range>Select frequency<
Selecting a radio station>Station ...< e.g. W-PLJ
Calling up a station>Select station< e.g. W-PLJ

AM

Function Command
Calling up AM >A M<
Playing AM >A M on<
Opening manual searchManual search<
Calling up a frequencyFrequency ... Kilohertz< e.g. frequency 753 kilohertz or 753 kilohertz

Weather Band

Function Command
Calling up the Weather BandWeather band
Switching on the Weather BandWeather band on
Selecting a Weather Band stationSelect a weather channel

Satellite radio

Function Command
Calling up the satellite radio>Satellite radio<
Switching on the satellite radio>Satellite radio on<
Selecting a satellite radio channel>Satellite radio channel ...< e.g. channel 2

Stored stations

Function Command
Opening the stored stations>Presets<
Choosing a stored station>Select preset<
Selecting a stored station>Preset ...< e.g. stored station 2

Telephone

Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu>Telephone<
Displaying the phone book>Phonebook<
Redialing>Redial<
Displaying accepted calls>Received calls<
Dialing a phone number>Dial number<
Displaying the list of messages>Messages<
Displaying Bluetooth>Bluetooth devices<

General information

Function Command
Navigation menu >Navigation<
Opening destination entry>Enter address<
Opening destination guidance >Guidance<
Starting destination guidance>Start guidance<
Ending destination guidance>Stop guidance<
Opening the home address>Home address<
Opening the route criteria>Route preference<
Opening the route>Route information<
Switching on the voice instructions>Switch on voice instructions<
Repeating a voice instruction>Repeat voice instructions<
Switching off the voice instructions>Switch off voice instructions<
Displaying the address book>Address book<
Displaying the last destinations>Last destinations<
Opening the traffic bulletins>Traffic Info<
Special destinations>Points of interest<

Map

Function Command
Displaying the map>Map<
Map facing north>Map facing north<
Map in the direction of travel>Map in direction of travel<
Perspective map>Perspective map<
Automatic scaling of the map*>Map with automatic scaling<
Changing the scale>Map scale<
Scale...feet*>Map scale ... feet< e.g. map scale of 100 feet
Scale...meters*>Map scale ... meters< e.g. map scale of 100 meters
Scale...kilometers*>Map scale ... kilometers< e.g. map scale of 5 kilometers
Scale...miles*>Map scale ... miles< e.g. map scale of 5 miles
Scale...yards*>Map scale ... yards< e.g. map scale of 100 yards

Split screen settings

Function Command
Split screen>Switch on splitscreen<
Switching off the split screen>Turn off split screen<
Adapting the split screen>Split screen content<
Split screen current position>Split screen current position<
Split screen map facing north>Split screen map facing north<
Split screen direction of travel>Split screen map in direction of travel<
Split screen perspective>Split screen perspective<
Automatically scaling the split screen>Split screen automatic scaling<
Split screen scale...feet*>Split screen scale ... feet< e.g. split screen scale of 100 feet
Split screen scale...meters*>Split screen scale ... meters< e.g. split screen scale of 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers*>Split screen scale ... kilometers< e.g. split screen scale of 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles*>Split screen scale ... miles< e.g. split screen scale of 5 miles
Split screen scale...yards*>Split screen scale ... yards< e.g. split screen scale of 100 yards
Split screen, computer>Split screen on board info<
Split screen, trip computer>Splitscreen trip computer<

Contacts

Function Command
Opening the contacts>Contacts<
My contacts>My contacts<
New contact>New contact<

BMW Assist

Function Command
Opening BMW Assist>B M W Assist<
Opening BMW Search*>B M W Search<
Opening the Internet*>Internet<

Vehicle information

Function Command

Opening the computerOnboard info
Opening the trip computerTrip computer
Opening the vehicle informationVehicle information
Opening the vehicle statusVehicle status

Settings

Vehicle

Function Command

Opening the main menu>Main menu<
Opening the settings >Settings<
Opening the options >Options<
Central display settings>Central display<
Opening the time and date settings>Time and date<
Opening the language and unit settings>Language and units<
Opening the speed limit settings >Limit<
Opening the light menu >Lighting<
Opening the door lock settings>Door locks<

Equipment

Function Command

Opening the air conditioning settings >Climate<

Everything from A-Z

Index

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions and refers you to the page where these texts can be found.

A

ABS Antilock Brake System 76

Acceleration assistant, refer to Launch Control 57

Accident, refer to Sending an Emergency Request 210

Activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 92

Adaptive brake light – brake force display 82

Adaptive Head Light 86

Additives – coolant 196

Address, entering 117, 123

Address for navigation – entering 117, 123

Adjusting temperature inside the car, refer to Automatic climate control 90

Adjusting the thigh support 38

Adjusting the tone during audio operation, refer to Tone control 136

Airbags 82

– indicator/warning lamp 84

- sitting safely 37

Air conditioning mode

- automatic climate control 90

- ventilation 92

Air distribution

- automatic 90

Air flow rate 91

Airing, refer to Ventilation 92

Air pressure, refer to Tire inflation pressure 186

Air recirculation, refer to Recirculated-air mode 91

Air supply

- automatic climate control 90

- ventilation 92

Air vents 89

AKI, refer to Fuel specifications 184

Alarm system 31

- avoiding unintentional alarms 32

- interior motion sensor 32

- switching off an alarm 32

- tilt alarm sensor 32

Album information for music 153

Albums of music collection 153

All-season tires, refer to Winter tires 190

AM, waveband 139

Ambient air, refer to Recirculated-air mode 91

Antenna for mobile phone 162

Antifreeze

- coolant 196

- washer fluid 60

Antilock Brake System ABS 76

Anti-theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 31

Anti-theft system 27

Approved axle loads, refer to Weights 220

Approved gross vehicle weight, refer to Weights 220

Armrest, refer to Center armrest 98

Arrival time, refer to Computer 64

Ashtray

-front 99

- rear 100

Assistance systems, refer to Driving stability control systems 76

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 91

Audio 136

- controls 136

- switching on/off 136

-tone control 136

- volume 136

Audio device, external 98

Automatic

– air distribution 90

– air flow rate 90

- cruise control 60

- headlamp control 85

Automatic car washes 199

Automatic climate control 89

– automatic air distribution 90

Automatic curb monitor 43

Automatic recirculated-air control AUC 91

Automatic Service Request 179

Automatic transmission with Steptronic

- towing 212

-tow-starting 212

AUTO program for automatic climate control 90

AUX-IN port 155

Average fuel consumption 64

- setting the units 65

Avoid highways in navigation 127

Avoiding unintentional alarms 32

Axle loads, refer to Weights 220

B

Backrest contour, refer to Lumbar support 38

Backrests, refer to Seat adjustment 38

Backrest width adjustment 39

Back seats

– refer to Rear seats 39

Backup lamps

– replacing bulb 205, 206

Backup lamps, refer to Tail lamps 205

Band-aids, refer to First-aid pouch 211

Bar, refer to Towing methods 213

Base plate for telephone or mobile phone

– refer to Snap-in adapter 171

– refer to Snap-in adapter in the center armrest storage compartment 98

Bass, tone setting 136

Battery 208

- charging 208

– disposal 34, 208

-jump starting 211

- remote control 26

- temporary power failure 209

Battery for mobile phone 171

Battery renewal

- remote control 34

- remote control for vehicle 34

Being towed 212

Belts, refer to Safety belts 41

Belt tensioner, refer to Safety belts 41

Beverage holders, refer to Cup holders 99

Blower, refer to Air flow rate 91

Bluetooth, activating/deactivating 164

Bluetooth, refer to separate Owner's Manual

BMW

-car shampoo 201

BMW Assist, activating 176

BMW Assist 175

BMW center 180

BMW Homepage 4

BMW Maintenance System 197

BMW Search 176

BMW webpage 4

Bottle holders, refer to Cup holders 99

Brake assist 76

Brake fluid, refer to Service requirements 66

Brake force display 82

Brake lamps

- replacing bulb 205, 206

Brake lights

- brake force display 82

Brake pads 106

- breaking in 106

Brake rotors 107

-brakes 106

- breaking in 106

Brakes

- ABS 76

– BMW Maintenance System 197

- brake force display 82

- breaking in 106

- parking brake 51

– service requirements 66

Brakes, refer to Braking safely 107

Brake system 106

– BMW Maintenance System 197

- breaking in 106

- disc brakes 107

Breakdown services, refer to Roadside Assistance 210

Breaking in the clutch 106

Breaking in the differential, refer to Engine and differential 106

Break-in period 106

Brightness of the Control Display 73

Bulb changing, refer to Lamps and bulbs 203

Button for starting the engine, refer to Start/stop button 49

Buttons on the steering wheel 11

C

California Proposition 65 warning 6

Call

-accepting 165

- ending 166

-rejecting 166

Calling, refer to Phone numbers, dialing 166

Can holders, refer to Cup holders 99

Capacities 220

Capacity of the cargo bay 220

Car battery, refer to Vehicle battery 208

Car care, refer to Care 199

Care 199

– automatic car washes 199

-care products 199

- carpets 201

- CD/DVD drives 201

-chrome parts 200

- displays 201

- exterior 199

-fine wood parts 201

- headlamps 200

– high-pressure washer 199

- interior 201

- leather 201

– light-alloy wheels 200

- paintwork 200

- plastic parts 201

-rubber seals 200

- safety belts 201

– sensors and cameras 201

- upholstery and cloth trim 201

- washing the car manually 200

-windows 200

- wiper blades 200

Cargo, securing 109

Cargo bay

-capacity 220

- convenient access 33

– folding up the floor panel 101

– lamp, refer to Interior lamps 87

- opening from inside 30

- opening from outside 30

Cargo loading

-securing cargo 109

-stowing cargo 109

- vehicle 108

Car jack

-jacking points 208

Car key, refer to Remote control 26

Car phone

- installation location, refer to Center armrest 98

– refer to separate Owner's Manual

Car phone, refer to Telephone 162

Car radio, refer to Radio 139

Car shampoo 201

Car wash

– before entering 51

Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 106

CBS Condition Based Service 197

CD, audio playback 144

CD changer 144

- controls 136

– fast forward/reverse 146

- installation location 148

– random play sequence 145

-selecting a track 144

-switching on/off 136

-tone control 136

-volume 136

CD player 144

- controls 136

– fast forward/reverse 146

– random play sequence 145

-selecting a track 144

-switching on/off 136

-tone control 136

-volume 136

Center armrest 98

Center brake lamp, replacing bulb 206

Center console, refer to Around the center console 14

Central locking

– from inside 29

- from outside 27

Central locking system 27

- convenient access 32

- hotel function 31

Changes, technical, refer to For your own safety 5

Changing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 203

Changing gears 54

Changing the language on the Control Display 73

Changing the measurement units on the Control Display 65

Changing wheels 208

Chassis number, refer to Engine compartment 193

Check Control 70

Check Gas Cap 184

Child-restraint fixing system LATCH 47

Child-restraint systems 46

Child-safety lock 48

Child seats, refer to Transporting children safely 46

Chrome parts 201

Chrome polish 201

Cigarette lighter, refer to Lighter 99

Cleaning headlamps 59

- washer fluid 60

Cleaning your BMW, refer to Care 199

Clock 62

- 12h/24h mode 69

- setting the time and date 69

- setting time 68

Closing

– from inside 29

– from outside 27

Clothes hooks 98

Cockpit 10

Cold start, refer to Starting the engine 50

Combined instrument, refer to Instrument cluster 12

Comfort access, refer to Convenient access 32

Comfort area, refer to Around the center console 14

Compartment for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 49

Compass 96

Computer 63

– displays on Control Display 64

Computer, refer to iDrive 16

Concierge service 175

Condensation, refer to When the vehicle is parked 108

Condition Based Service CBS 197

Configuring settings, refer to Personal Profile 26

Confirmation signals for locking/unlocking the vehicle 28

Congestion

– refer to Route, bypassing sections 128

Connecting vacuum cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 100

Consumption, refer to Average consumption 64

Consumption indicator, refer to Average consumption 64

Control Center, refer to iDrive 16

Control Display

- brightness 73

– changing the language 73

-switching off/on 19

Control Display, refer to iDrive 16

Controller, refer to iDrive 16

Controls and displays 10

Control unit, refer to iDrive 16

Convenient access 32

- replacing the battery 34

Convenient operation

- glass roof 28

– glass roof with convenient access 33

- windows 28

- windows with convenient access 33

Coolant 196

-checking level 196

Coolant temperature 63

Cooling, maximum 90

Cooling fluid, refer to Coolant 196

Cooling system, refer to Coolant 196

Copyright 2

Corner-illuminating lamps, refer to Adaptive Head Light 86

Cornering lamps, refer to Adaptive Head Light 86

Correct tires 190

Country codes DVD 146

Courtesy lamps, refer to Interior lamps 87

Criteria for route 127

Cross-hairs in navigation 122

Cruise control 60

Cruising range 64

Cup holders 99

Curb weight, refer to Weights 220

Current playback of music collection 152

Current position

- displaying 133

Customer Relations 179

D

Dashboard, refer to Cockpit 10

Dashboard, refer to Instrument cluster 12

Dashboard lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 87

Data, technical 218

-dimensions219

- engine 218

- weights 220

Data transfer 180

Date

- date format 70

- setting 69

Daytime running lamps 86

Deactivating front passenger airbags 83

Deadlocking, refer to Locking 28

Defect

- door lock 29

Destination, entering by town/ city name 117

Destination address

- entering 117, 123

Destination for navigation

- entering by voice 123

- entering via map 122

- entry 117

- home address 120

-manual entry 117

Destination guidance 127

- bypassing a route section 128

- changing specified route 127

- continuing 127

-starting 127

- voice instructions 128

– volume of voice instructions 129

Digital clock 62

Digital compass 96

Digital radio, refer to High Definition Radio 140

Dimensions 219

Directional indicators, refer to Turn signals 58

Direction instructions, refer to Voice instructions 128

Directory for navigation, refer to Address book 119

Displacement, refer to Engine data 218

Display, refer to iDrive controls 16

Display lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 87

Displays

-on the Control Display 16

Displays, refer to Instrument cluster 12

Displays and controls 10

Disposal

-coolant 196

- remote control battery 34

- vehicle battery 208

Distance remaining to service, refer to Service requirements 66

Distance warning, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 75

Door key, refer to Remote control 26

Door lock 29

Doors, emergency operation 29

DOT Quality Grades 188

Draft-free ventilation 92

Drinks holders, refer to Cup holders 99

Drivelogic 55

Drive mode 53

Drive-off assistance, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

Drive-off assistant 78

Drive position, engaging, refer to Selector lever positions 52

Drive programs, refer to Drivelogic 55

Driving lamps, refer to Parking lamps/low beams 85

Driving notes 106

Driving off on hills, refer to Drive-off assistant 78

Driving stability control systems 76

Driving through water 107

Driving tips, refer to Driving notes 106

Dry air, refer to Cooling function 91

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 76

DVD

– country codes 146

- settings 147

– video playback 146

DVD menu 147

DVD video 146

Dynamic Stability Control DSC

-indicator/warning lamp 77

-M Dynamic Mode MDM 76

E

EDC, refer to Electronic Damper Control 77

Eject button, refer to Buttons on the CD player 136

Electric

- seat adjustment 38

Electrical malfunction

- door lock 29

– driver's door 29

– M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic 54

Electric seat 38

Electric seat adjustment 38

Electric steering wheel lock

– with convenient access 33

Electronic brake-force distribution 76

Electronic Damper Control EDC 77

Electronic oil level check 193

Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

Emergency operation

– fuel filler door, manual release 184

Emergency operation, refer to Closing manually

-glass roof 36

Emergency operation, refer to Manual operation

-door lock 29

Emergency release

– luggage compartment lid from inside 31

Emergency Request 210

Emergency services, refer to Roadside Assistance 210

Engine

- breaking in 106

-data 218

– overheated, refer to Coolant temperature 63

-speed218

- starting 50

- starting, convenient access 32

- switching off 50

Engine compartment 193

Engine coolant, refer to Coolant 196

Engine oil

- adding 195

– BMW Maintenance System 197

-checking level 193

- intervals between changes, refer to Service requirements 66

- possible displays 194

Engine output, refer to Engine data 218

Engine speed, refer to Engine data 218

Engine starting, refer to Starting the engine 50

Entry lamps, refer to Interior lamps 87

Entry map for destination 122

Equalizer, tone setting 137

Error messages, refer to Check Control 70

Event data recorders 198

Exhaust system, refer to Hot exhaust system 106

Exterior mirrors 42

- adjusting 42

- automatic dimming feature 43

- automatic heating 43

– folding in and out 42

External audio device 98

Eyes

– for tow-starting and towing away 212

-for tying down loads 109

F

Failure messages, refer to Check Control 70

Failure of an electrical consumer 209

False alarm

- avoiding unintentional alarm 32

– switching off an alarm 32

Fastening safety belts, refer to Safety belts 41

Fastest route for navigation 127

Fast forward

- CD changer 146

- CD player 146

Filter

– refer to Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 92

First aid pouch 211

Fixture for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 49

Flash when locking/unlocking 28

Flat tire

– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 79

Flat tire, repairing 206

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 78

- indicating a flat tire 79

-indicator/warning lamp 79

- initializing the system 78

- malfunction 79

– snow chains 78, 191

– system limits 78

Flat tires, refer to Tire condition 189

Fluid reservoir, refer to Washer fluid reservoir 60

FM, waveband 139

Folding up the floor panel 101

Footbrake, refer to Braking safely 107

Footwell lamps, refer to Interior lamps 87

Forward position, engaging, refer to Selector lever positions 52

For your own safety 5

Free memory capacity, music collection 154

Front airbags 82

FTM, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 78

Fuel 184

- average consumption 64

-gauge 63

– high-quality brands 184

- quality 184

– specifications 184

- tank contents, refer to Capacities 220

Fuel clock, refer to Fuel gauge 63

Fuel display, refer to Fuel gauge 63

– releasing in the event of electrical malfunction 184

Fuses 209

G

Garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 94

Gasoline

– refer to Average consumption 64

Gasoline, refer to Required fuel 184

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel gauge 63

Gasoline engine, checking engine oil level 193

Gear

- neutral 53

Gear display, refer to Displays in the instrument cluster 54

Gearshift lever

- manual transmission 51

Gearshifts

- manual transmission 51

General driving notes 106

Glass roof, electric 35

– closing after electrical malfunction 36

- convenient operation 28, 29

- initializing 36

- opening, closing 35

– operation with convenient access 33

– pinch protection system 36

- power failure 36

- raising 35

- remote control 28

Glove compartment 97

GPS navigation, refer to Navigation system 116

Grills 89

Gross vehicle weight, refer to Weights 220

H

Handbrake, refer to Parking brake 51

Hands-free system 14

Hazard warning flashers 14

HD radio, refer to High Definition Radio 140

Head airbags 82

Headlamp control, automatic 85

Headlamp flasher 58

-indicator lamp 11, 13

Head restraints 39

- rear, removing 39

– sitting safely 37

Heated

-mirrors43

- rear window 92

-seats40

Heating

-mirrors 43

- rear window 92

- residual heat 91

-seats40

Heating and ventilation, refer to Climate 89

Heating while at a standstill, refer to Using residual heat 91

Heavy loads, refer to Stowing cargo 109

Height, refer to Dimensions 219

Height adjustment

-seats 38

- steering wheel 43

High beams 87

– headlamp flasher 87

-indicator lamp 13

High Definition Radio 140

High-pressure washer 199, 200

High water, refer to Driving through water 107

Highways, refer to Route criteria 127

Hills 107

Holders for cups 99

Homepage BMW 4

Hood 192

Hooks for shopping bags 101

Horn 10, 11

Hotel function 31

Hot exhaust system 106

Hydraulic brake assist, refer to Brake assist 76

Hydroplaning 107

I

IBOC, refer to High Definition Radio 140

Ice warning, refer to Outside temperature warning 62

ID3 tag, refer to Information about the track 145

ID3 tags, refer to Album information 153

Identification marks, tire coding 188

iDrive 16

-adjusting brightness 73

- changing language 73

– changing units of measure and display format 65

- controls 16

- menu guidance 17

- operating principle 16

- overview 16

- setting the date and time 69

-start menu 17

- status information 19

iDrive operating principle 16

Ignition 49

- switched off 50

-switched on 49

Ignition key, refer to Remote control 26

Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 49

Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 49

Ignition lock 49

Imprint 2

Indicator and warning lamps 13

- MDrive 45

-M Dynamic Mode 77

– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 80

Inflation pressure, refer to Tire inflation pressure 186

Inflation pressure monitoring, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 79

Initializing

- after power failure 209

- compass, refer to Digital compass, calibrating 96

- Flat Tire Monitor FTM 78

- glass roof 36

– radio, refer to Station, storing 139

– refer to Setting the time and date 69

Installation location

- CD changer 148

– navigation DVD drive 116

- telephone 98

Instructions for navigation system, refer to Voice instructions 128

Instrument cluster 12

Instrument lighting 87

Instrument panel, refer to Cockpit 10

Integrated key 26

Integrated universal remote control 94

Interior lamps 87

- remote control 28

Interior motion sensor 32

Interior rearview mirror 43

- automatic dimming feature 43

- compass 96

Intermittent mode of the wipers 59

Intersection, entering, navigation 118

iPod, connecting, refer to AUX-IN port 155

iPod, connecting, refer to USB-audio interface 156

J

Jacking points 208

Joystick, refer to iDrive 16

Jumpering, refer to Jump starting 211

Jump starting 211

K

Key, refer to Remote control 26

Keyless go, refer to Convenient access 32

Keyless opening and closing, refer to Convenient access 32

Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 26

Knock control 184

L

Lamps

- automatic headlamp control 85

- parking lamps/low beams 85

Lamps and bulbs, replacing bulbs 203

Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer to Safety belts 41

Lashing eyes, refer to Securing cargo 109

Last destinations 120

LATCH child-restraint fixing system 47

Launch Control 57

Leather care 201

LED light-emitting diodes 203

Length, refer to Dimensions 219

License plate lamp, replacing bulb 206

Light-alloy wheels 200

Light-emitting diodes LED 203

Lighter 99

- connecting electrical appliances 100

Lighting

-instruments87

-lamps and bulbs 203

- vehicle, refer to Lamps 85

Light switch 85

Limit, refer to Speed limit 72

Load securing equipment, refer to Securing cargo 109

Lock buttons, doors, refer to Locking 30

Locking

- adjusting confirmation signal 28

- from inside 30

– from outside 28

– without remote control, refer to Convenient access 32

Locking and unlocking doors

- confirmation signals 28

- from inside 29

- from outside 27

Low-beam headlamps 85

- automatic 85

Lower back support, refer to Lumbar support 38

Luggage compartment lid 30

- convenient access 33

- emergency release 31

- locking or unlocking separately 31

- opening from inside 30

- opening from outside 30

- remote control 28

Luggage rack, refer to Roof-mounted luggage rack 109

Lumbar support 38

LW, waveband 139

M

M+S tires, refer to Winter tires 190

Maintenance, refer to Service Booklet

Maintenance system 197

Malfunction

- tires 79

Malfunction warnings, refer to Check Control 70

Managing music 153

Manual car wash 200

Manual operation

-door lock 29

- driver's door 29

- transmission lock 54

Manual transmission 51

-tow-starting 214

Map display 129

Map for navigation

- changing scale 129

- entering destination 122

Master key, refer to Remote control 26

Maximum cooling 90

Maximum speed

- with winter tires 190

MDM, refer to M Dynamic Mode 76

"MDrive" 44

MDrive 44

M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic 52

- kick-down 53

- Launch Control 57

- neutral 53

- reverse gear 53

- sequential mode 53

- Shift Lights 56

- shiftlock 53

-tow-starting 214

– unlocking transmission lock manually 54

M Dynamic Mode MDM 76

-indicator lamp 77

Measurements, refer to Dimensions 219

Memory, refer to Seat and mirror memory 40

M Engine Dynamics Control 58

MENU button 16

Menus, refer to iDrive 16

Microfilter

– BMW Maintenance System 197

– for automatic climate control 92

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

– BMW Maintenance System 197

Microphone

- telephone 14

- voice commands 14

Mirror dimming feature 43

Mirrors 42

- automatic curb monitor 43

- exterior mirrors 42

- heating 43

- interior rearview mirror 43

– memory, refer to Seat and mirror memory 40

Mirrors, folding in before entering a car wash 42

M Mobility System 206

Mobile phone

-adjusting volume 165

- connecting, refer to Mobile phone, pairing 162

– installation location, refer to Center armrest 98

– operation via iDrive 165

-pairing 162

– refer to separate Owner's Manual

Mobile phone, installation location, refer to Center armrest 98

Mobile phone, refer to Telephone 162

Mobile phone, refer to the separate Owner's Manual

Modifications, technical, refer to For your own safety 5

Monitor, refer to iDrive controls 16

Monitoring system for tire pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 78

MP3 player, connecting, refer to AUX-IN port 155

MP3 player, connecting, refer to USB-audio interface 156

Multifunctional steering wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11

Multifunction switch

– refer to Turn signals/headlamp flasher 58

– refer to Wiper system 59

Multimedia screen, refer to iDrive 16

Music, playing 152

Music collection 151

- backup 154

- importing 154

Music player, connecting, refer to AUX-IN port 155

Music player, connecting, refer to USB-audio interface 156

Music search 152

N

Navigation announcements, refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 128

Navigation data 116

Navigation drive, location 116

Navigation DVD 116

Navigation system 116

- address book 119

– bypassing a route section 128

– continuing destination guidance 127

-destination entry 117

– displaying current position 133

- entering a destination by voice 123

- entering a destination manually 117

-route list 128

– selecting destination via map 122

– selecting route criteria 127

– special destinations 120

– starting destination guidance 127

- terminating destination guidance 127

- voice instructions 128

- volume adjustment 129

Neck support, refer to Head restraints 39

Nets, refer to Storage compartments 98

Neutral 53

New tires 189

North-facing map 129

Nozzles 89

Number of cylinders, refer to Engine data 218

Nylon rope, refer to Tow rope 213

O

OBD socket, refer to Socket for On-Board Diagnosis 198

Octane ratings, refer to Fuel specifications 184

Odometer 62

Oil, refer to Engine oil 193

Oil consumption 193

Oil level 193

Old batteries, refer to Disposal 208

Onboard tool kit 203

Opening and closing

- convenient access 32

- from inside 29

– from outside 27

- using the door lock 29

– via the remote control 27

Options, selecting for navigation 127

Orientation menu, refer to Start menu 17

Outlets

– refer to Ventilation 92

Output, refer to Engine data 218

Outside-air mode

- automatic climate control 91

Outside temperature display 62

- changing units of measure 65

-in computer 65

Outside temperature warning 62

Overheated engine, refer to Coolant temperature 63

Overview

- radio control 136

P

Paintwork care 200

Park assistant, refer to Park Distance Control 75

Park Distance Control PDC 75

Parked car ventilation 92

-preselecting switch-on times 93

– switching on and off directly 93

Parking

- vehicle 50

Parking aid, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 75

Parking brake 51

-indicator lamp 51

Parking lamps 85

Parking lamps/low beams 85

Passenger-side mirror tilt function 43

Pathway lighting 86

Personal Profile 26

Phone book 165

Phone numbers

-dialing 166

Pinch protection system

-glass roof, electric 36

- windows 35

Placing a call, refer to telephone owner's manual

Polish 201

Pollen

– refer to Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 92

Position, refer to Current position, displaying 133

Postal code, entering for navigation 118

Power failure 209

Power windows 34

- safety switch 35

Power windows, refer to Windows 34

Pressure, tires 186

Pressure monitoring, tires 78

- Flat Tire Monitor 78

Pressure monitoring of tires, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 79

Programmable buttons on the steering wheel 11

Protection function, refer to Pinch protection system

- glass roof, electric 36

- windows 35

Providing medical assistance, refer to First aid pouch 211

Puncture

- Flat Tire Monitor 78

R

Radio

- controls 136

– High Definition Radio 140

- satellite radio 142

-selecting a waveband 139

-storing stations 139

-switching on/off 136

-tone control 136

-volume 136

Radio-operated key, refer to Remote control 26

Radio position, refer to Radio readiness 49

Radio readiness 49

- switched off 50

- switched on 49

Rain sensor 59

Reading lamps 88

Rear lamps, refer to Tail lamps 205

Rear seats

- adjusting head restraints 39

– folding down backrests 100

– folding head restraint down and up 40

Rear ventilation 92

Rearview mirror, refer to Mirrors 42

Rear window blind, refer to Roller sun blinds 97

Rear window defroster 92

Rear window safety switch 35

Receiving level of mobile phone, refer to Status information 19

Reception

- quality 140

- radio station 140

Recirculated-air mode 91

Recirculation of air, refer to Recirculated-air mode 91

Reclining seat, refer to Backrest 38

Refueling 184

Releasing

- hood 192

Remaining distance, refer to Cruising range 64

Remote control 26

-battery renewal 34

- convenient access 32

- garage door opener 94

- luggage compartment lid 28

- malfunction 28, 33

- removing from the ignition lock 49

– service data 197

Replacement remote control 26

Replacing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 203

Replacing tires 189

Replacing tires, refer to New wheels and tires 189

Reporting safety defects 6

Reserve warning, refer to Fuel gauge 63

Reset, refer to Resetting tone settings 138

Residual heat 91

Restraint systems

- for children 46

– refer to Safety belts 41

Reverse

- CD changer 146

- CD player 146

Reverse gear 53

- manual transmission 52

Road map 129

Roadside Assistance 175, 210

Roadside parking lamps 87

Roadworthiness test, refer to Service requirements 66

Roller blind

– sun blinds 97

Roof load capacity 220

Roof-mounted luggage rack 109

Rope, refer to Tow-starting, towing away 213

Rotary/pushbutton, refer to iDrive 16

Route 127, 128

– bypassing sections 128

- changing 127, 128

- changing criteria 127

– displaying streets or towns/cities 128

– map display 129

-selecting 127

Route instructions, refer to Destination guidance through voice instructions 128

Route map, refer to Map display 129

Route section, changing 128

Route selection 127

S

Safety-belt height adjustment 41

Safety belts 41

- damage 42

-indicator/warning lamp 42

- reminder 42

– sitting safely 37

Safety systems

-airbags 82

- Antilock Brake System ABS 76

- brake system 76

– driving stability control systems 76

– Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

- safety belts 41

Satellite radio 142

- enabling channel 142

-selecting channel 143

-storing channel 143

Screen, refer to iDrive controls 16

Screw thread for tow fitting 212

SDARS, refer to Satellite radio 142

Sealant, filling 207

Seat adjustment

-electric 38

-mechanical 38

Seat and mirror memory 40

Seat belt reminder, refer to 'Fasten safety belts' reminder 42

Seat heating 40

Seats 37

- adjusting electrically 38

- adjusting the seats 38

- heating 40

– memory, refer to Seat and mirror memory 40

-saving a setting, refer to Seat and mirror memory 40

- sitting safely 37

Securing cargo 102

Securing the vehicle

- from inside 29

– from outside 27

Selecting new scale for navigation 129

Selector lever positions 52

Sequential M Gearbox with Drivelogic

– Drivelogic drive programs 55

Sequential mode 53

Service, refer to Roadside Assistance 210

Service car, refer to Roadside Assistance 210

Service data in the remote control 197

Service Interval Display, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 197

Service Request 179

Service requirement display, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 197

Service requirements 66

Services status 180

Settings

– changing settings on the Control Display 73

-clock, 12h/24h format 69

- configuring, refer to MDrive 44

- DVD 147

-language 73

Settings and information 65

Setting times, refer to Preselecting switch-on times 93

Shifting 54

Shifting gears

- manual transmission 51

Shift lever 52

Shift Lights 56

Shiftlock 53

Shift paddles on steering wheel 54

Shift-up display, refer to Shift Lights 56

Shock absorber control, refer to Electronic Damper Control EDC 77

Short commands for the voice activation system 221

Short route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 127

Shuffled, refer to Random

- CD changer 145

- CD player 145

Side airbags 82

Side window blind, refer to Roller sun blinds 97

Side windows, refer to Windows 34

Signal horn, refer to Horn 10, 11

Sitting safely 37

- with airbags 37

– with head restraint 37

– with safety belts 37

Ski bag 102

Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to Glass roof, electric 35

Slot for remote control 49

Smokers' package, refer to Ashtray 99

Snap-in adapter

-inserting/removing 171

-use 162

Snap-in adapter, refer to Center armrest storage compartment 98

Snow chains 191

Socket, On-Board Diagnosis OBD 198

Socket, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 100

SOS, refer to Sending an Emergency Request 210

Sound output for entertainment on/off 136

Spare fuses, 209

Spare fuses, refer to Fuses 209

Special destinations 120

Speed

– with winter tires 190

Speed limit 72

Speed limit warning, refer to Speed limit 72

Speedometer 12

Speed Volume 137

Split screen, refer to Control Display, switching on/off 19

Split screen content, refer to Display for split screen content, selecting 19

Spray nozzles, refer to Cleaning windshield and headlamps 59

Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 76

Start/stop button 49

-starting the engine 50

– switching off the engine 50

Starting, refer to Starting the engine 50

Starting assistance, refer to Jump starting 211

Starting difficulties

-jump starting 211

Starting the engine

-start/stop button 49

Start menu 17

State/province, for navigation 117

Station, selecting

- radio 139

Status of this Owner's Manual at time of printing 5

Steam jet 199, 200

Steering wheel 43

- adjustment 43

- buttons on steering wheel 11

-lock 49

- locking with convenient access 33

- MDrive button 44

- shift paddles 54

Steering wheel buttons, refer to Shift paddles 54

Storage 202

Storage compartments 98

Storage nets 101

"Store Channel" on the radio 143

Storing music 151

Storing seat positions, refer to Seat and mirror memory 40

Storing tires 190

Stowage, refer to Storage compartments 98

Street, entering, navigation 118

Summer tires, refer to Wheels and tires 186

Sun blinds 97

Surface ice, refer to Outside temperature warning 62

SVCD 146

SW, waveband 139

Switches, refer to Cockpit 10

Switching off

- engine 50

Switching on

- audio 136

- CD changer 136

- CD player 136

- radio 136

Switching the cooling function on and off 91

Switch-on times of parked car ventilation, preselecting 93

Symbols 4

- status information 19

- traffic bulletins for navigation system 130

T

Tachometer 62

Tail lamp

-replacing bulb 206

Tail lamps 205

-replacing bulb 205

Tank contents, refer to Capacities 220

Technical data 218

-capacities 220

-dimensions219

Technical modifications, refer to For your own safety 5

Telephone 162

– installation location, refer to Center armrest 98

– refer to separate Owner's Manual

TeleService Diagnosis 176

TeleService Help 176

Temperature

- automatic climate control 90

- changing unit of measure 65

– coolant, refer to Coolant temperature 63

Temperature display

- outside temperature 62

- outside temperature warning 62

- setting the units 65

Tempomat, refer to Cruise control 60

Tensioning straps, refer to Securing cargo 109

The individual vehicle 5

Third brake lamp, refer to Center brake lamp 206

Through-loading system 100

Tilt alarm sensor 32

Tilt function, passenger-side mirror 43

Timer, refer to Preselecting switch-on times 93

Tire inflation pressure 186

-loss 79,80

Tire pressure monitoring, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 78

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 79

- resetting the system 80

– system limitations 79

– warning lamp 80

Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 79

Tire Quality Grading 188

Tires

-age188

- air loss 80

– breaking in 106

- changing, refer to Changing wheels 208

- condition 189

- damage 189

– inflation pressure 186

- labels 188

– minimum tread depth 189

– new wheels and tires 189

– pressure monitoring, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 78

– pressure monitoring, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 79

-puncture 79

-replacing 189

-size 188

- storage 190

-tread depth 189

- wear indicators, refer to Minimum tread depth 189

–wheel/tire combination, refer to Correct wheels and tires 190

- winter tires 190

TMC station, refer to Traffic bulletins 130

Tone

-control 136

– middle setting 138

Tools, refer to Onboard tool kit 203

Top 50 of music collection 153

Torque, refer to Engine data 218

Tow bar 213

Tow fitting 212

-screw thread 212

Tow fittings for tow-starting and towing away 212

Towing 212

– with manual transmission 213

– with M dual clutch transmission 213

Towing and tow-starting 212

Towing methods 213

Town/city, for navigation 117

Tow rope 213

Tow-starting 212, 213

TPM, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor 79

Track

-selecting on CD 144

Traction control, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

Traffic bulletins

-categories 131

Traffic bulletins, filtering 131

Traffic bulletins for navigation 130

– during destination guidance 131

-in map display 131

Traffic jam

– displaying traffic bulletins 130

Transmission

- Drivelogic 55

- Launch Control 57

- manual transmission 51

- reverse gear 53

- Shift Lights 56

– unlocking transmission lock manually 54

Transmission lock, unlocking manually 54

Transporting children safely 46

Transport securing devices, refer to Securing cargo 109

Travel instructions refer to Voice instructions 128

Tread depth, refer to Minimum tire tread 189

Trip-distance counter, refer to Trip odometer 62

Triple turn signal activation 58

Trip odometer 62

Trunk lid, refer to Luggage compartment lid 30

Turning circle, refer to Dimensions 219

Turn signal indicators

-indicator/warning lamp 12

– triple turn signal 58

Turn signals 58

TV

-control elements 136

-switching on/off 136

-tone control 136

-volume 136

Tying down loads, refer to Cargo loading 109

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading/UTQR 188

Units

- average consumption 65

- temperature 65

Universal garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 94

Universal mobile phone preparation package, refer to separate Owner's Manual

Universal remote control 94

Unlatching, refer to Unlocking 32

Unlocking

– from inside 30

– from outside 27

– luggage compartment lid 33

– without remote control, refer to Convenient access 32

USB-audio interface 156

V

VCD 146

Vehicle

-battery208

- breaking in 106

-cargo loading 108

– Identification Number, refer to Engine compartment 193

– measurements, refer to Dimensions 219

- parking 50

- weight 220

Vehicle jack 208

Vehicle position, refer to Displaying current position 133

Vehicle storage 202

Ventilation 92

-draft-free 92

-in therear92

Ventilation, refer to Climate 89

Ventilation while at a standstill 92

Vents, refer to Ventilation 92

Video menu 146

Video playback 146

Voice, refer to Destination guidance through voice instructions 128

Voice commands

- overview 22

– short commands 221

Voice instructions from navigation system 128

- repeating 129

- switching on/off 128

- volume 129

Volume 136

– audio sources 136

- fuel tank, refer to Capacities 220

- mobile phone 165

- TV 136

- voice instructions 129

Volume balance, tone setting 137

W

Warning and indicator lamps 13

Warning messages, refer to Check Control 70

Warning triangle 211

Washer fluid 60

– content of the reservoir 60

Washer fluid reservoir 60

Waste tray, refer to Ashtray 99

Water on roads, refer to Driving through water 107

Water penetration 199, 200

Waveband with the radio 139

Wear indicators in tires, refer to Minimum tread depth 189

Weights 220

Welcome lamps 85

Wheel/tire combination, refer to Correct wheels and tires 190

Wheelbase, refer to Dimensions 219

Wheels, new 189

Wheels and tires 186

Width, refer to Dimensions 219

Windows 34

- convenient operation 28

- convenient operation with convenient access 33

- opening, closing 34

-pinch protection system 35

-safety switch 35

Windows, indicator on Control Display 16

Windshield

- cleaning 59

Windshield wash 59

- filling capacity, reservoir 220

- nozzles 60

- reservoir for washer fluid 60

- washer fluid 60

Windshield wiper blades, changing 203

Windshield wipers, refer to Wiper system 59

Winter tires 190

- setting speed limit 72

- storage 190

Wiper blade replacement 203

Wiper system 59

Word-matching principle for navigation 127

Work in the engine compartment 192

Wrench/screwdriver, refer to Onboard tool kit 203

X

Xenon lamps

-replacing bulb 204

Y

Your individual vehicle

- settings, refer to MDrive 44

- settings, refer to Personal Profile 26

More about BMW bmwusa.com The Ultimate Driving Machine

01 41 2 600 934 ue iDrive

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : BMW

Model : M3 Sedan (2009)

Category : Car